Home

CAAPE User`s Manual

1. Logic Block Indent 0 25 Figure 8 10 Graphical Logic Print Page Setup Sizes Use the Page Header and Page Footer tabs to setup header and footer text Up to four rows of left justified centered and right justified text can be set Select a category of data to be extracted from the VPC or CSI file date time or file data or user entered text Page Setup X Options Sizes Page Header Page Footer Program Number User Test Print Date Time n eference Only None None None None None None None None None Cancel Figure 8 11 Graphical Logic Print Page Setup Headers P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 47 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 13 3 3 Printing and Print Preview Go to File Print Preview to preview the print go to File Print to print 8 13 3 4 Logic Information File This file provides relay state information that is not contained in the main logic file used by the compiler If the logic file was created from graphics this file is also created automatically If the logic file did not come from graphics but the logic printout must reflect relay states e Manually create a Logic Information File use Add File to Application to add a VTI or NVI file and then edit the file to set the states The file consists of a LOGIC STATE SECTION header followed by a list of relay states on one or more lines The state for relay
2. Figure 7 9 Grid Find Replace Dialog Enter the Find What Replace With text and click the appropriate button When Enable Wildcards is selected the Find What text can include the wildcard characters to replace any combination of characters and to replace a single character The Direction and Scope controls determine what grid cells are searched for matching text P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 16 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 9 Upgrading Boards In CAAPE 006A and later CPU PD boards can be converted to CPU II and CSEX1 or CSEX2 boards to CSEX3 with a simple menu selection Right click on the board and select Upgrade to CPU2 or Upgrade to CSEXS from its popup menu The board is converted to the new type while preserving all its other properties 7 3 10 Setting Board Relationships Non Vital I O and TWC NVTWC boards must be assigned to a controlling CSEX board Right click on the board and select Set CSEX Control from the popup menu Identify the CSEX board that controls this board The slot of the controlling board is displayed in the controlled board Vital output boards in a module must be paired Right click on a Vital output board and select Set Board Pair from the popup menu Identify the paired board Each paired board displays the slot of its partner VPI hardware rules require that only one Vital output board can be left unpaired in a given module P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 17 Alstom Signaling I
3. CALLINT TO BIN DIP SWITCHES DIPSW 01 DIPSW 02 DIPSW 03 DIPSw 04 DIPSw 05 DIPSW 06 DIPS W 07 DIPSw 08 DIPSw 03 DIPSW 10 DIPSw 11 DIPS W 12 DIPSw 13 DIPS W 14 DIPSw 15 DIP5W 16 Type CALL Statement Filters r Format CALL subroutine name arguments Cancel Figure 7 17 Function Statement Properties Select the desired statement Type The Format field shows the expected format Enter the statement text using the expected format as a guide as shown in Figure 7 17 Cut and paste or drag and drop names from the Variable Names list into the statement if needed When statement data is entered and OK pressed a new statement is created and inserted in the logic at the caret position The ladder logic editor uses fixed distances between consecutive statements The newly inserted equation s location is determined by this spacing rather than by the caret position at the time of insertion P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 35 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 155 Editing Statement Properties Edit the basic properties of a statement by e Double clicking on its header e Moving the caret over its header and pressing Enter or going to Edit Open in the main menu Right clicking on the header and selecting Open in the popup menu The appropriate dialog box appears 7 5 6 Editing Boolean Equations Available equation types depend on the target a
4. VPI Logic Vital logic on CPU PD CPU II or VSP Link Protocol Command Components various For protocol configuration P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 5 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 2 4 Setting Component Description When a component is created a text description of its usage and intent can be entered Right click on the component and select Edit Description from its popup menu A dialog for entering descriptive text is displayed Enter the text and click OK 7 2 5 Removing Components To remove a component right click on the component to get its popup menu Select Remove amp Delete Component to remove the component and delete its files Remove Component can also be selected to remove the component but not delete its files however the component files no longer belong to a project and are now orphaned These files can still be imported into a new project but their file names and extensions must be known 7 2 6 Renaming Components Right click on the component and select Rename Component from its popup menu Enter the new component name 7 2 7 Editing Components To edit a component go to the ComponentView in the Project Workspace Right click on the component and select Edit from its popup menu or double click on the component to open it for editing When editing a graphical system it is possible to open components that have been linked into the system by going to the ProjectView or the editing screens
5. CSEX boards that communicate with a CPU PD or CPU II board or NVSP boards that communicate with a VSP board require a VPI to CSEX message component to specify their DPRAM based communications Open the board go to its Board tab and go to the VPI Communications Message section on the tab Click the Messages button to add a message component TWC and NVTWC boards require Train to Wayside message components to specify the messages they send and receive Open the board and go to the Serial Messages section Click the Messages button to add message components CSEX NVSP and CenTraCode ll s CPU boards require non vital serial message components to specify the messages they send and receive Open the board go to the desired Serial Port tab and go to the Serial Messages section on the tab Click the Messages button to add message components Depending on how the component is used the Source or Destination column of the message data is used A single component can be linked as both a control received message and an indication transmitted message P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 54 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics VSC boards require point to point Vital Serial message components to specify the messages they send and receive Open the board and go to the Serial Messages section Click the Messages button to add message components Depending on how the component is used the Source or Destination column of the message data is u
6. Simulator Reference CYC Execute the application logic of the current application for the specified number of cycles or amount of time If tracing or monitors are set the affected equations are displayed as they execute See SIM for execution of single statements see RUN for running all applications at once Formats CYC execute the logic one full cycle from the current starting point CYC END execute the logic until the end of the logic has been reached CYC NOCHG execute the logic until no equation results have changed for a full cycle or until MAX time has elapsed CYC num cycles execute the logic the specified number of cycles from the cur rent starting point CYC mm MINUTES ss SECONDS execute the logic for the specified time period where num cycles is the number of full logic cycles to run A cycle is one full pass through the logic from the current starting point and back again mm and ss are the minutes and seconds to run the logic This period is in simula tion time not necessarily real time as perceived by the user Examples CYC CYC NOCHG CYC 10 CYC 2 MINUTES 5 SECONDS DEL See ADD P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 37 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference FBRK NFBRK Sets or clears a filament break failure condition for the specified output in the current application Filament break causes the filament checks to fail when the output is evaluated Formats FBRK var name set filament break c
7. The Message Wizard can also be used to enter variables that make up a message See the section on graphical systems for details 7 4 1 Source and Destination Names In many cases it is possible to enter both source and destination variable names in the same screen Source and Destination names are from the point of view of the board that sends or receives the data source refers to data sent by the board and destination refers to data received by the board Special Messages Non Vital Serial or Train to Wayside messages containing protocol status and receive transmit control flags are always considered destination data and their variables should always be placed in the Destination column Non Vital Serial and Vital Serial message components can be used in various ways to represent a pair of messages two ends of the same message or one end of a single message e Use a single component to represent a paired set of one source and one destination message on the same board port The transmitted message is represented by the component s Source column and the received message is represented by its Destination column e Share a single component between systems to represent both sides of a single message that is passed between the systems The sending system uses the component s Source column and the receiving system uses its Destination column Use separate components for all source and destination messages In this case each comp
8. The View Hotkey Bar main menu item can be used to show or hide this bar 7 5 3 2 Using the Logic Toolbar The logic toolbar can be used to Insert equations branches and equation variables Toggle a variable s complementing and normal contact states Goto the Next or Previous statement from the current caret location Display the Find and Replace dialog Go to the View Logic Toolbar main menu item to show or hide this toolbar While inserting new data or modifying variables the toolbar is different from the equivalent main or popup menus Rather than doing the operation immediately at the caret location the program waits for the user to move the mouse to the desired point and click there to insert or modify the data The mouse cursor changes as the mouse is moved to indicate valid target locations for the chosen toolbar operation This user control over the target point location is especially useful when several branches or variables have to be inserted or if several variables need their states toggled If the Ctrl key is held down the toolbar button stays active until e The last application after the Ctrl key is released e The user clicks on the toolbar button itself to deactivate it The user clicks outside a valid target location Using the toolbar button with the Ctrl key held down can help the user drop a number of empty branches and undefined variables to quickly build up the structure of an equation with a
9. These commands are processed by individual applications Minimum command text is shown in upper case Commands that can be automatically captured from the user interface into a script file are indicated in the seconds column Table 13 4 Application Level Commands Command Capture Meaning ADD filename Y Add simulation logic file BRK varname Y Add breakpoint by result name BRK amp nnn Y Add breakpoint by statement number Bool varname List statement by result name Bool amp nnn List statement by statement number Bool amp nnn amp mmm List statements by range of statement numbers Bool List all statements CHG varname h Add changepoint by result name CHG amp nnn Y Add changepoint by statement number CLR ALL Clear all breakpoints and changepoints CLR BRK varname Y Clear breakpoint by result name CLR BRK amp nnn Y Clear breakpoint by statement number CLR BRK Y Clear all breakpoints CLR CHG varname Y Clear changepoint by result name CLR CHG amp nnn Y Clear changepoint by statement number CLR CHG Y Clear all changepoints CLR MON varname Y Clear monitor by result name CLR MON amp nnn Y Clear monitor by statement number P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 55 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference Table 13 4 Application Level Commands Cont Command Capture Meaning CL
10. P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 59 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 8 9 Message Wizard When components have been linked into a system their variables are now available for use in the system and CAAPE is able to determine based on which boards use the components the full list of variables used in each application For example a Vital VPI application includes e All Vital I O variables The variables in the VSC ATP or CRG messages linked to their respective boards The variables in the Vital logic component linked to the CPU PD board The variables in the VPI to CSEX messages linked to CSEX boards in the system The Message Wizard can be used to set message contents based on a list of the variables available in the application Go to the board where a message is used select the message from the list of messages if necessary and click the Message Wizard button P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 60 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Message Wizard Introduction X The Message Wizard will help you assign variables to a message Select or verify the message type and click Next Name SprNVMsg rw E Back Cancel Figure 7 33 Message Wizard Introduction Page P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 61 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics In the Introduction page select a message type and click Next The Message Wizard collects all the variables available for use in the selected message this may
11. PTR stmt num where stmt num is the hexadecimal statement number of the statement Example PTR 1F4 RESET Resets certain simulation conditions for the current application PROJRESET performs the reset command for all applications at once Formats RESET AOCD sets all load currents present clears load current absent failure conditions RESET CPU sets equation pointer to start and all variables False RESET LAMP sets all filaments intact clears filament break conditions RESET VALUE sets all variables False P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 45 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference RMARK RUNMARK GEN Controls the generation of relay equivalent files for the current application Relay files contain information that can be used by certain Alstom programs to diagram logic equations in a relay based format Before generating a relay file the equations to be included in the file must be selected marked The logic is then cycled or the values of variables are set manually to set the variables into their normal relay states The state values for the selected variables are saved in a file which is then used by the relay diagramming program to draw the relays as normally open or normally closed Formats where RMARK select all equations for use in the relay file RMARK var name select equation by result name RMARK amp stmt num select equation by statement number RMARK amp start stmt num amp end stmt num select
12. See SECTION 11 Using the Graphical Simulator for more details 8 9 2 Text Simulation Text simulation is the only simulation available for CAA packages prior to CAAPE 005A Select the application folder and go to Actions Simulate in the main menu or click the Simulate toolbar button Text simulation is described in the appropriate CAA Reference Manual P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 31 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 10 APPLICATION DATA VERIFICATION 8 10 1 Need for Verification INTENDED SAFE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE VPI SYSTEM MUST BE VERIFIED The safety of the application logic as written is the responsibility of an experienced signaling engineer CAAPE does not make any determination regarding the inherent safety of the logic equations that were entered Verifying the accuracy with which CAAPE converted the experienced signaling engineer s application data into PROM data structures is aided by CAAPE but the signaling engineer must make a final determination using information supplied by CAAPE CAAPE s compilers are not themselves Vital programs An additional independent process is needed to verify that the compile was done correctly This process is required for all Vital applications An experienced signal engineer must verify the safety of the VPI data and its application It is the signaling engineer s responsibility to verify the correctness of the VPI input data in that it accurately represents the intended
13. To install CAAPE software follow the procedure in Table 4 1 AlsDload installation installs USB bridge drivers Table 4 1 Install CAAPE Software Step Procedure 1 Insert the installation disk into the CD ROM drive Select Start from the Taskbar and Run from the Menu bar enter x 1Setup exe where x is the CD ROM drive letter 2 Alternately open the Windows Explorer then browse to and double click Setup exe on the CD ROM drive 3 Follow the instructions displayed by the installation program When asked for a Serial Number enter the installation serial number exactly as provided 4 4 STARTING AND EXITING CAAPE To start CAAPE select Start from Taskbar and Programs Caape CAAPE from the Menu bar CAAPE is also automatically launched when double clicking on a CAAPE Project cpb file To exit CAAPE select File Exit from its main menu click the X close button at the upper right of the title bar or right click on the symbol at the upper left of the title bar and select Close from the system menu Depending on the operating system settings it may be necessary to check that CAAPE runs with administrative privileges Navigate to the Program Files folder Alstom right click on CAAPE exe and select Properties On the Compatibility tab under Privilege Level verify or select the checkbox Run this program as an administrator P2512A Rev J Aug 15 4 2 Alstom Signaling Inc Getting Started
14. gt Down Close Figure 11 12 Setup History Dialog Select an application A list of variables is displayed The list can be filtered by variable type and entering text in the Match control searches for the first variable whose name starts with that text Select the desired variables and click Add When the simulator is cycled history data is collected on the selected variables and displayed in the first Current tab of the History Window The Setup History dialog can also be used to remove variables from the History Window or change their positions in the History Window See 11 14 Using the History Window for details on viewing history data P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 23 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 6 Using the Variable Selector Window The Variable Selector Window can be used to add variables to the Watch and History windows to locate parameter usages and to setup track plan devices Go to View Parameter List in the main menu H vorable selector BITE App MSFYARD gt Type jf ff Mateh Figure 11 13 Variable Selector Dialog Use the Type control to select variables by type and the Match control to search for variables that start with the entered text Select a variable from the list and drag it into the Watch Window or History Window to add the variable to the window Right click on a variable and use the Find Usages popup menu to search for the places w
15. Sync Message Limit E Figure 7 23 Link Protocol LPC Editing View 7 6 1 Printing A text printout of the component s data can be obtained by selecting File Print in the main menu P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 46 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics T T USING THE VARIABLE LIST DIALOG The Variable List is a floating dialog that can be used to view and copy the graphical variable names in the project It can be accessed in various ways depending on the type of graphical component being edited APPLV OK VM1 APPLY OK OTR APPLV DK SB Set Filtering Figure 7 24 Variable List Dialog The Variable List is continuously updated as variables are added or deleted Entering text in the window just above the list causes the list to be scrolled to the first name that matches the text Multiple variables in the list can be selected and dragged into a graphical editing window such as a grid or a logic view window or right click on the selected names and select Copy to copy them to the Clipboard Right clicking a list variable and selecting Where Used from its popup menu displays all the graphical components where the variable appears Click Set Filtering to open a dialog for specifying parameters with which to filter the variables in the list P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 47 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Variable List Filtering x Scope Component CU Usages All And NOT Wildcards
16. x is specified by entering x T for normally closed and x F for normally open e Import the logic file into a logic component edit the component to set the desired relay states and then export the component back into text files Since exporting the component changes the format of the main logic text file temporarily save it somewhere else and then copy it back after the Logic Information File is created P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 48 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 13 4 Relay Equivalent Drawing Package REDP The Relay Equivalent Drawing Package can also be used to print logic directly from the VTL or NV file Like the Logic Print Window it makes use of an independent process to read and print the logic and can therefore provide a diverse check of the ladder logic export process Additionally the REDP provides the ability to use custom borders and save the graphical logic in DXF format for import into a CAD system To start up the REDP and pass it the logic documentation and relay state files in an application select the application folder in the FileView Go to the main menu and select Actions Utilities REDP This item is only available if the REDP is installed The REDP is launched and passed the paths of the application files The exact process is as follows 1 The application s main VPC or CSI file is located and passed to the REDP The REDP reads this file and extract customer information recor
17. 2 4 Document ConventionS s 3 o no xr I Roe I ee c ALLEY eae we 2 3 2 5 Common Abbreviations and Glossary lille 2 4 2 6 Related Publications i25 42 3 E TI EZ ERR ERREUR EN LANA 2 7 SECTION 3 IntroducliOn sexes ea Ret XAR BEA KARA DRA REWORG CR 3 1 3 1 What IS CAPE s s 2 6 todo tS NIT Se YUG KNA aided Hee deine ec 3 1 3 2 Theory Of Operation sssi aka la eot pow BG Eran os e edd m pa man BG 3 1 AP PIUCAHOWS 5 atate KABANG PB UA CORN Da ac ES 3 1 System Software and Application Data 3 2 CAAPE Projects and their Contents llle 3 2 Using GAAP E 5 852 siu fade mu bo ise AO AULA LA de e od 3 3 GAA VISIONS ug d PRAE CREARI NO LER d ORE ACE ACC CUR Dae 3 4 3 3 System Requirements cele nn 3 5 Computer and Operating System cece eens 3 5 Additional FlardWate rao IEE REE REE EL RD A 3 6 Additional Software 22 2 3 6 SECTION 4 Getting Started eee 4 1 4 1 INUOGUCION e ases a3 rca PURIS 69 AENEIS ANAK NAN Ns 4 1 4 2 Preparing to Install CAAPE 2 4 1 Installation Serial Number 0 00 4 1 Installation Prerequisites 000 00 cc ccc nee 4 1 4 3 Installing CAAP E C exi secare Sa aad rw teed See JAD P HALANG 4 2 4 4 Starting and Exiting Caape s seEc9e REBEL TA AALAGA 4 2 4 5 User interface Elements csc daa kape ip o8 oe e Sinne lan 4 3 4 6 Setting User Preferences oceneni ee neo ou rae aa aa EE e aa 4 6 4 7 Helpand
18. 7 9 MAKE FILES AND BUILD When all components have been edited and linked together in a system the system can be built Building a system is the process of creating application data from the graphical components The graphical data is converted into textual input files and the compilers are run to generate output and report files Application folders containing these files are created in the FileView of the Project Workspace Application file names correspond to the Build Names of the Vital and non vital processor boards see below Table 7 3 shows the relationship between the graphical items in the ProjectView and the corresponding items placed in the FileView after a Build Table 7 3 ProjectView vs FileView Contents After Build Graphics ProjectView System Folder FileView System folder VPI System VPI system folder CPU PD hardware board VPI application folder and files CPU Il hardware board build Main VPI2 Main application folder and files CPU II hardware board build Comm VPI2 Comm application folder and files CSEX1 CSEX2 CSEX3 hardware board CTC2v application folder and files CSEXA hardware board CSEXA application folder and files iVPI GTP board iVPI GTP application folder and files iVPI System iVPI system folder iVPI VSP hardware board build Main iVPI VSP Main application folder and files iVPI VSP hardware board build Comm iVPI VSP Comm appl
19. ACR files and determines that they both show the same results If they do this shows that the application data reconstructed from PROM is identical to that originally entered by the user P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 34 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files The VPI Compiler converts the complex Boolean expressions in the Vital logic into the sum of products form required by the VPI system see below The ADV verifies that this was done correctly by independently reading the logic file and converting it into sum of products form then comparing this data to the logic stored in PROM data structures The comparison results are shown in the ADV s consolidation report ADV versions prior to 032F 023U are not able to read VPI Library file elements in creating the consolidation report 8 10 3 Preparing to Run the ADV The ADV requires the main HEX file as well as the Vital serial VBn files created by the compiler To create ADV reports with readable variable names compile with the Generate ADV Information run control selected This causes the compiler to create an ADV file that links readable variable names to the RAM memory addresses saved in the data structures in the EPROM file It is preferable to run the ADV against the actual EPROM files created by splitting the HEX file for the high low address chips on the CPU PD or CPU II board The CAAPE includes a utility for taking the EPROM files and recombining them into the
20. HEX file This utility is run automatically if the ADV is run automatically after compile otherwise the files can be recombined manually Go to the FileView and select one of the split files in the application s Output folder Go to Actions Utilities VPI Combine in the main menu The files are combined into a HEX file the original HEX file is saved to a BKX file first so it is not lost However the EPROM files are obtained a compatible ADV file is required to be able to get a readable ADV report 8 10 4 Running the ADV To manually run the ADV program go to the FileView Select the VPI application folder ADV is enabled if an application HEX file exists Go to Actions Verify Data in the main menu or click the Verify button on the main toolbar The ADV program runs and generates the LSV and ACR report files which are placed in the application s Report folder See the VPI CAA Reference Manual for details on ADV reports A Run Control setting can also be selected for the VPI application to run the ADV automatically whenever a compile is done P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 35 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 10 5 Consolidation Reports The Consolidation Reports have two elements the VCR file produced by the compiler and the ACR file produced by the ADV These files are compared section by section to verify that the EPROM data output by the compiler correctly represents what the user entered See the VPI CAA R
21. Rev J Aug 15 7 39 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 6 10 2 Equation Results The entire equation is set normally open or normally closed All results in the equation take on this state and changes to each result also affect any other contact or coil with the same name 7 5 6 10 3 Compatibility with Older Versions of CAAPE CAAPE versions 005B and earlier did not change the relay state of all contacts or coils with the same name at once The user had to set the normally open or normally closed state of each relay contact and coil individually if the user failed to do this correctly the relay states of coils and contacts with the same name could be inconsistent When the current CAAPE opens a ladder logic component that was created with an earlier version of CAAPE it attempts to make the relay states of all contacts and coils consistent The user should examine the logic to verify that the CAAPE did this as expected P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 40 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 7 Deleting Statements Selected statements can be deleted by selecting the statement and using Edit Delete in the main menu the Delete item in the popup menu or the Delete key 7 5 8 Commenting Uncommenting Statements Selected Boolean equations and function statements can be made inactive without having to delete them The process is called commenting and can be done by clicking Comment in the statement s popup menu Comme
22. This section describes the basic operation of the Graphical Simulator 11 1 1 The Graphical Simulator The Graphical Simulator program enables simulating the operation of one or more applications running simultaneously It provides these capabilities Cycle a selected application or all applications in various modes for a period of time for a number of cycles until the end of the application logic until no more result variables change or free running until the user requests simulation to stop Step a selected application one or more logic statements at a time Display and save information on executed logic statements using trace and logging options Set breakpoints to automatically stop simulation when a selected logic statement is reached Link messages and l O points between applications so that data is automatically passed from one application to the other as the simulator runs View and set the values of selected variables View and set the status of hardware I O points View and set the status and contents of input and output messages View an application s logic statements in ladder logic format Create track plan layouts and link their elements to application variables in order to obtain a visual display of interlocking operation as the applications run Collect history data on selected variables to view how their values have changed over time Create and execute scripts of simulator commands P2512A Rev J Au
23. an editor for directly creating and editing library files this is different from the old OS 2 CAA which had to compile instructions in a separate text file in order to process library files 8 6 1 Creating Library Files To create a VPI Library file go to CAAPE s FileView Select an application folder and go to Add File to Application in its popup menu Enter the file name select the Library file type and click OK An empty library file is created and placed in the application folder Existing library files can be imported into an application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 10 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 6 2 Editing Library Files To edit a library file select it in the FileView and go to Edit File in its popup menu or double click on the file An editor is displayed for editing the file s contents The Properties tab is used to enter general file documentation Library File x Properties Members Mame sizes Miss ssim ERU Ie n HE Part Number 0000000000 Revision Copyright jo Contract Number FO Contract Name cc Customer Name mo Last Rev 11 28 2005 11 04 06 CAA 31754 006 150 4 Cancel Apply Figure 8 3 Library File Editor Properties Page The Members tab is used to manage the library members that are available for insertion into application logic P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 11 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files Library File LibMemberl Figu
24. e Consolidation Report file VCR summary of application data created to be compared to a similar file LACR which is created by the ADV e Tracker file CAS Reserved for Alstom use only e Label files HPS SFS created if the I O Label Information run control is selected Plotter files for creating front cover labels for the VPI modules See 8 8 5 Creating VPI Labels e Vital Compiler Output file VCO created by the vital compiler and contains the output log from the compiler run that scrolls by in the CMD window when the vital compiler runs ADV Output file LADO created by the ADV program and contains the output log from the ADV that scrolls by in the CMD window when the ADV runs P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 21 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 8 1 1 EPROM Files The compile process produces application system files to be used in programming the memory devices on the boards When boards use high low address EPROM chips the compiler output must be split into two one for each chip The CPU PD application and system software files are split automatically if the application run controls are set to have the ADV run automatically after compile Otherwise the files must be split manually Go to the FileView and select the application folder or the HEX compiler output file in the application s Output folder Go to Actions Utilities PROM Split in the main menu or click the PROM Split button on the main to
25. e g due to a Bootloader version mismatch a standalone EPROM programmer needs to be used to update the firmware 8 11 4 Checksum Values The checksums reported by the PROM Split utilities and reported in the application s configuration report are simple additive values that can be compared against the checksums produced by the EPROM programmer In VPI CAA 027B and CenTraCode Il s CAA 014B and later the EPROM files fill all unused areas with hexadecimal FF values as long as the recommended memory device is used no prefilling of the programmer s memory buffer is needed For earlier CAA versions or when a larger memory device is used than the one recommended prefill the programmer s memory buffer with zeroes P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 42 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 12 MANAGING APPLICATION FILES 8 12 1 Removing Application Files To remove an entire application right click on the application folder in the FileView and select Remove and Delete Application The application is removed from the project and all its files are deleted from the PC Selecting Remove Application removes the application from the project but does not delete any files To remove an individual application file right click on the file and select Remove amp Delete File from its popup menu The file is removed from the project and deleted from the PC Selecting Remove File removes the file from the project but does not delete it To remove and
26. 10 5 Creating Entire Systems from Text Files Go to the ProjectView right click on the project icon or on a system folder and select Import VPI System from Text Identify the main text files for the applications that make up the system VPC for the Vital application if any and CSI for each non vital application CSI files are assigned to CSEX boards in the hardware based on a numeric ID from 1 to n these numbers are not related to the board type numbers in CSEX2 and CSEX3 Look at the slot assignments of the CSEX boards in the hardware file and note the boards ID numbers make sure the CSI file for CSEX board 1 is the first one listed in the dialog the CSI file for CSEX board 2 is the second one listed and so on VPI to CSEX communications must be defined using files that are shared between the Vital and non vital applications one set of VPI to CSEX message variable names cannot be used on the Vital side and another set of names on the non vital side The following steps are performed e A hardware component is created and its contents are set based on the contents of the hardware text file The Vital application files are read Logic and message components are created and assigned to the appropriate boards Vital logic is assigned to the CPU PD or CPU II board Vital serial messages are assigned to VSC boards etc The non vital application files are read Logic message and LPC components are created and assigned to the ap
27. 14 USING THE HISTORY WINDOW The History Window displays how the values of selected variables have changed over time The History Window contains at least one tab the Current tab that displays currently selected variables and their values Other tabs are displayed if previously saved history data files are opened Selected variables are listed vertically and their value histories are displayed horizontally The application and name of each variable is displayed the display areas of their text can be changed to clicking on their vertical column lines and dragging horizontally Use the Setup History dialog to configure the contents of the History Window Use the horizontal scroll bar to scan the history information The upper left corner of the window displays the current time scale and the time coordinate where the visible history data starts The time scale can be changed using the window s popup menu The History Window is a dockable tool bar It can be docked at the top bottom or either side of the Graphical Simulator s main window or can be made to float anywhere on the screen Use the History Window s popup menu to control its placement History Window popup menu contents are Allow Docking When checked allows the History Window to be docked at top bottom or sides of the main window If not checked allows it to float anywhere on the screen Hide Hide the History Window Go to View History Window in the main menu to sho
28. 4 5 USER INTERFACE ELEMENTS When the program is started the main CAAPE window is displayed Ua CAAPE File Actions View Options Help as 2 For Help press F1 Figure 4 1 Main CAAPE Window The horizontal section with the word CAAPE at the top is the title bar It contains the CAAPE symbol at the left the title area that displays names of the items whose editing windows are active and at the right are the Minimize Maximize and Close buttons Directly below the title bar is the main menu This is used to select various CAAPE operations depending on what is currently being edited In this manual a vertical line is used to describe the sequence of items in a menu selection For example File Exit means to Click File in the main menu to get its drop down list and then e Click Exit from the drop down list P2512A Rev J Aug 15 4 3 Alstom Signaling Inc Getting Started The toolbar is located below the main menu Buttons on the toolbar can be clicked to select certain operations As with the main menu the toolbar s contents may change depending on what is currently being edited Additional toolbars may also be displayed for certain graphical editing operations Tool Tips display what the toolbar buttons do Move the mouse cursor over a button and briefly pause it there The purpose of the button is displayed under the cursor and described in CAAPE s status window The tabbed window to the left just below the toolba
29. 43 Internal Variables Dialog 0 00 c eee eee ee 7 44 Alstom Signaling Inc LIST OF FIGURES Figure No Title Page Figure 7 23 Link Protocol LPC Editing View llle 7 46 Figure 24 Variable List Dialog ick NIN bi pa R aes Se ENNA 7 47 Figure 7 25 Variable List Filtering Dialog llli 7 48 Figure 7 26 System Wizard System Documentation 7 50 Figure 7 27 System Wizard Hardware Component 7 51 Figure 7 28 System Wizard Build Names lessen 7 52 Figure 7 29 System Wizard Component Links 4 7 53 Figure 7 30 Vital Serial Editing View with Component Linking 7 56 Figure 7 31 Link to Components Dialog 0000 7 57 Figure 7 32 Revision History Page 030 maa AA a 7 58 Figure 7 33 Message Wizard Introduction Page 7 61 Figure 7 34 Message Wizard Assign Variables Page 7 62 Figure 8 1 New Application Dialog 0 020 ee eee 8 5 Figure 8 2 Import Applications Dialog m wg deat e eee eka 8 6 Figure 8 3 Library File Editor Properties Page 8 11 Figure 8 4 Library File Editor Members Page sss sells 8 12 Figure 8 5 Library Member Editor 000 050 eee eee 8 13 Figure 8 6 VSP CPU2 Main Run Controls accessible from ProjectView or FileView 8 16 Figure 8
30. CAAPE s title bar at the very top The VPI Logic editing window is active so the main menu s contents have changed to include logic editing features e The main toolbar has changed a project is open and more CAAPE operations are now available Additional toolbars are displayed to support logic editing The Message Workspace displays status messages from a previous compile operation P2512A Rev J Aug 15 4 5 Alstom Signaling Inc Getting Started 4 6 SETTING USER PREFERENCES User preferences are general options for using CAAPE Start CAAPE go to its main Options menu and click User Preferences The User Preferences dialog is displayed User Preferences Detault Project Path c Nalstomprograms4caape Apps ae Default E ditor C NWINDOWS Notepad exe TE Default Logic Zoom Percent 100 m m Copy Project copies Colors v Source Category Dutputs Ladder Logic Reports Color Equation Hes Set Defaults Cancel v Show all wamings Figure 4 3 User Preferences P2512A Rev J Aug 15 4 6 Alstom Signaling Inc Getting Started The Default Project Path and Default Editor preferences are the most important Consider setting them immediately the others can be set later as needed Depending on CAAPE version some or all of the following options are available Enter user preferences and click OK The preferences displayed in the dialog are saved they st
31. CONTROL MUST BE MAINTAINED Failure to update and maintain the Software Revision IDs for every software change made to the application data and or system software even a re compile done with no software changes jeopardizes proper software revision control and can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment Alstom strongly recommends that Software Revision IDs be changed with every software change even a re compile of unchanged software Software Revision IDs shall be maintained so that software and application revision control is maintained and the expected configuration of all VPIs in the train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control systems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the system s safety integr
32. Component data is stored in two files a symbol file extension smb which contains information on variable names used in the component and a data file extension depends on component type which contains the rest of the component data The user should not normally have to be directly concerned with these files component data is ordinarily accessed only through CAAPE s user interface P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 3 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 2 3 Creating a Component Click on the ComponentView tab of the Project Workspace to make it active Right click the folder for the desired category of component and select Add Component from its popup menu The Add Component dialog is displayed for entering the component s name and type Add Component Path C SAlstomProgramsNCaapeNAppsSvpi4b Name NothStreetVpiH Type CenTraCode II S Hardware a Cancel Figure 7 1 Add Component Dialog Each component in the project must be given a unique identifying name Enter the component name and select the type then click OK A new component is created and added to the ComponentView A component editing window is displayed in the Edit Workspace Data can now be entered or the editing window can be closed and reopened for editing later Components can also be created by using the System Wizard to create a graphical system See the topic Creating Graphical Systems for more details However since creating a system involv
33. Files A CAAPE project is a collection of files including e A set of files containing any graphical components The text based application source compiler input files either produced from the graphical components by a Make Files operation or entered manually The output and report files created by compiling the application source files as well as outputs and reports produced by other CAAPE tools The main CAAPE project file which identifies all of the above files and their relationships See SECTION 12 CAAPE File Structure for a complete list of files and their extensions P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 2 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects 5 1 5 Viewing Project Data Project data is displayed in the Project Workspace window of CAAPE Each tab in the window displays a different aspect of the project The Project Workspace is shown undocked in Figure 5 1 through Figure 5 3 The ProjectView displays graphical systems in this hierarchy Project name top folder System folders representing the hardware systems in the project The hardware modules in each system The boards in each module The graphical components linked to each board Project Workspace Ea Queens VPI E Module 1 VPISY S Slot 1 NVI Slot 2 NVI Slot 3 NYO Slot 4 NYO Slot 5 CSEX3 Slot 6 CPU PD 2 Queens VTL Logic Slot 7 I OB Ej BG ProjectView Fieview Figure 5 1 ProjectView Workspace
34. Getting Started 4 7 HELP AND TUTORIALS Instructional help files and tutorials are accessed by going to Help in CAAPE s main menu To view context sensitive help on using a specific window or dialog box in CAAPE activate the window and press the F1 key For example if the User Preferences dialog is open pressing F1 causes help on using the dialog to be displayed P2512A Rev J Aug 15 4 8 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects SECTION 5 CAAPE PROJECTS 5 1 OVERVIEW 5 1 1 Projects and their Locations A project is a collection of related CAAPE data and is the top level item handled by CAAPE A project s data is stored in a number of files some directly available to the user experienced signal engineer and others only for internal use by CAAPE The Project File cpb file is the main file associated with the CAAPE program describing the locations and relationships of all the other files in the project The scope of a project how many systems at how many customer locations the project represents is up to the user Many projects can exist on a given PC but CAAPE can only open one project at a time All the files for a given CAAPE project are usually stored in a single directory on the PC It is possible in some cases to have a CAAPE project refer to files outside its home directory but care must be taken not to move rename or delete the files or CAAPE is not able to find them 5 1 2 Systems and Applications Project dat
35. Incrementing the revision ID SOFTWARE REVISION CONTROL MUST BE MAINTAINED Failure to properly version control VPI system software and application data can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment Alstom strongly recommends that strict revision control of the VPI application data and system software be maintained so that the expected configuration in the train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control systems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any designs or for the safe performance of the train control system P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 1 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Cha
36. JXOUID SOCIO v5 KA v aor un RP Fn aU E qu a UE NUR Mn doma 13 6 13 2 7 Hardware SCCHON 2 5 5 ou own ee LIDAN KA d Rd eon RN BA 13 7 13 2 7 1 ODIIOIS 5 ma Pale p O33 G dogg PIANOS BAG DAGAN 13 8 13 2 7 2 BOGS uo aui Ned acr i at S gd dia b ted are HERR RR 13 8 13 2 7 3 SIA i tardes ssa su emu O Ut 13 9 13 2 7 4 Board Information 21i ka naa PG c uo PP es 13 10 13 2 7 4 1 Protocol Subsection au uates de e mc o 13 11 13 2 7 4 2 Inputs Subsection ica os o NAGE PREMERA ER EAX TR 13 11 13 2 7 4 3 Outputs Subsection llle 13 12 13 2 8 Messages Section oc seo Wa RENE RE RA RE REAR OI REV ES 13 13 13 2 9 Recommendations for Creating Dummy Applications 13 15 13 3 Simulation Logic File Format 2n sae hate Pee eee ERE DE 13 16 130 Symbol Section e reo eh tiles Eee voce Na NG 13 16 133 2 BTOB SECHON 24 BACK cria tract mtn Macau May doon te Ka Aa as s MG Ny 13 17 13 4 Predefined Simulator Logic Functions a 13 19 13 4 1 User Message Logging Functions liliis 13 19 13 4 2 Non Vital Serial Special Message Functions 13 20 13 4 3 Non Vital Serial Indication Transmit Functions 13 22 13 4 4 TWC NVTWC Special Message Functions 13 23 13 45 Utility PUNCHONS 2 lt cx NG KAYA cech ee RUE ake ee eee os 13 24 13 5 Protocol Definition File Format eee ee 13 25 13 5 1 Event Handler Functions vici oy be 4 RE EUR YA ERE 13 25 13 5 2 NV Serial Event Hand
37. N CSS Queens DT amp LPC z Bs Projectview Componentview FileView Ly Figure 5 3 FileView Workspace ProjectView ComponentView and FileView are selected by clicking on the appropriate tab in the Project Workspace Expand or close a higher level element by clicking on the symbol or by double clicking on the name Click on an element to select it The element is highlighted and certain CAAPE operations become available depending on the element type Certain menu items or toolbar buttons such as the ones for compiling are only enabled if the appropriate element is selected Double click on a lower level element to open it for editing Right click on an element to get a popup menu listing the available operations that can be performed on that element P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 5 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects 5 2 CREATING A PROJECT Select File New Project from the main menu or click the New button on the main toolbar A Project Wizard dialog is displayed The Documentation page is used to fill in the project location name and documentation data x Project Location c alstomprograms caape Apps ur Name Tesi Application Description Designer Checker Copyright Revision oo 00 Back Cancel Figure 5 4 Project Wizard Documentation Location is the base directory in which the new project directory is created To change the location manua
38. P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 3 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects The ComponentView displays the graphical components that are used to make up graphical systems Project name top folder Component type folders Hardware Message Logic and Link Protocol Command The components of each type Project Workspace Lj Queens Qa Hardware 2 Queens1A GH 5 Message EF Gp Logic o2 Queens NV o2 Queens VTL e Q2 VTL Lg Link Protocol Command Bg Projectview Gomponentview E Fileview Figure 5 2 ComponentView Workspace P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 4 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects The FileView displays the individual files used and produced by compilers and other tools e Project name top folder System folders corresponding to the system folders in the ProjectView Application folders These contain the application data PROM files report files etc for the processor boards such as CPU PD and CSEX Output folder This contains output files such as EPROM files e Output files Report folder This contains report files generated by the compilers and other tools Report files Compiler input source files These files are created from graphical data by a Make Files or entered manually by the user Project Workspace 5 Queens VPI EF Ca Queens1 NY CTC2v GF 9 Output E Ca Report Bueens1 HDw Queens1 NY PRM Bueens NV NV Bueens NV VC1 Queens1
39. PREPARING FOR SIMULATION Prior to compiling an application select the application in the FileView and go to Options Run Controls in the main menu to get the Run Controls dialog Select the Generate GraphSim Information option When the application is compiled a simulator data file extension SMV for Vital applications SMN for non vital applications is generated This file contains information on the variables messages hardware and logic equations in the application and is required to be able to simulate the application using the Graphical Simulator 11 3 SIMULATOR PROJECTS The Graphical Simulator uses a Simulator Project File extension SPJ to contain information on the applications to be simulated the track plans to be displayed and the script files to be executed The applications can be in the same CAAPE project or in multiple CAAPE projects The project file points to other files that contain the data Applications the SMV or SMN simulator data files created by the compilers Can be in any directory Track Plans one SCN file per track plan Created through the simulator Must be in the same directory as the project file e Scripts one VSC file per script Created through a text editor Must be in the same directory as the project file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 3 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 4 STARTING THE SIMULATOR If all the applications to be simulated are in the s
40. PROJECT Open an existing project by using File Open Project in the main menu or clicking the Open button on the main toolbar Browse to the project file The project is opened and its Project Documentation Window is displayed CAAPE can only have one project open at a time If a project is already open it must be closed before creating or opening a new one A previously opened project can also be opened by clicking on its name in the Most Recently Used MRU list near the bottom of the File menu 5 4 IMPORTING A PROJECT It is possible to copy all or part of one project into another one In general the process involves opening the target project and identifying the source data to be imported To import an entire project follow the procedure in Figure 5 1 Table 5 1 Importing a Project Step Procedure 1 Open the target project Click on the ProjectView tab of the Project Workspace and then right click on the top Project folder Click Import Project in the popup menu 3 A prompt for the source project s main cpb file is displayed Select the desired source file The contents of the source project and any files associated with it are copied to the target project directory and the target project is updated If a file is being 4 copied into the target project directory and a file of that name already exists a choice is given of what to do about it copy the new file to a different name overwrite the existing fil
41. Run on the Windows Menu bar and executing CAAPE s internal CAA uninstall program passing it the path of the ACU file in the directory of the CAA package to be removed For example if CAAPE is on the e drive and the 029B package is to be removed type the following eAcaape Uninstall e caape 029b uninstall acu Individual CAA packages can be installed in CAAPE 008A and later as long as CAAPE already exists on the computer Go to the CAAPE installation disk and look in its CAA directory to find the CAA packages that are available Each subdirectory is named according to the version of CAA it contains Run setup exe in the subdirectory of the desired CAA package P2512A Rev J Aug 15 10 5 Alstom Signaling Inc Configuration Control 10 4 CAAPE REVISION INFO REPORT A report on the versions of CAAPE and its elements can be found by going to the About CAAPE dialog Help About on the main menu and clicking the Revision Info button The report includes the versions of the CAAPE itself and of its subsystems such as the CAA packages the dates and times of their files are compared to the expected dates and times for these versions and any discrepancies are reported as a warning that tampering may have occurred The versions of some of the system software and protocol files are listed as well P2512A Rev J Aug 15 10 6 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator SECTION 11 USING THE GRAPHICAL SIMULATOR 11 1 INTRODUCTION
42. accommodate newer versions of system software or to accommodate new features or fix bugs in the tools CAAPE can be considered a top level program that provides access to the lower level CAA packages When compiling an application to create PROM files the CAA package to be used for compiling must be specified This is often a simple matter consider using the latest version of CAA available However in some cases it may be necessary to select a CAA based on the version of Vital system software used in the system CAAPE typically comes with a CAA package of the 023x series for compatibility with the old 40026 191B CPU PD system software a CAA package for use with the latest available CPU PD system software and for CAAPE 019A and later a CAA package for use with the latest available CPU PD system software a CAA package for use with the latest CPU II No Network system software a CAA package for use with the latest CPU Il system software and a CAA package for use with the latest VSP system software Application settings and run controls determine the version of the CAA package to be used and the options for compile and other operations P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 2 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 3 TEXT BASED WORK FLOW It is possible to work entirely with text files by entering text application data directly rather than using graphical data Text based operation can be used on existing text only files or when graphical dat
43. address EPROM files for direct memory device programming The CPU application and system software files are split automatically if the application run controls are set to have the ADV run automatically after compile Otherwise the files must be split manually Go to the FileView and select the application folder or the HEX compiler output file in the application s Output folder Go to Actions Utilities PROM Split in the main menu or click the PROM Split button on the main toolbar The individual EPROM files are created and shown in the application s Output Folder File checksums and CRCs are reported in the CAAPE s Message Workspace and output to the configuration report CFG file in the Report folder See Section 8 11 Programming Memory Devices for details P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 24 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 8 3 iVPI VSP Main Applications Main subsystem Inputs include Application source files VPC HDW created by the user VSP system software from the selected CAA version Output folder files include Application data structures HEX created if the Generate PROM file run control is selected can be downloaded to the board or can be split into individual high low address EPROM files for programming application memory devices Also read by the Application Data Verifier to prove that application data was created correctly System software HEX copied from the CAA package directory
44. be correct in actual operation prior to the return of revenue service Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment FSSVT PASSWORDS MUST BE PROTECTED FSSVT passwords shall be provided only to responsible personnel that have been properly trained in the FSSVT modification verification and validation process Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment FSSVT SIGNATURE VALUES MUST BE VERIFIED Verify through Vital signatures that FSSVT values that were not intentionally changed have retained their original signature values Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 7 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Change Process FSSVT MODIFICATIONS MUST BE VERIFIED All FSSVT modifications are safety critical and must be verified using the AlsDload program or the Application Data Verifier program within CAAPE to determine whether the iVPI application PROM code data has been encoded as specified by the AlsDload FSSVT compiler Refer to Alstom Publication P2521A iVPI Product Overview Manual sections Application Verification The basis of the application of iVPI is to use a tool to
45. ciis othe orem eoe Co a ie omes 8 14 8 7 Settings and Run Controls 0 0 0 7 aaa less 8 15 8 7 1 Seng Se Me cio steep dor arab va t a ICE RC PRO pea AE 8 15 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 V Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 8 7 2 Iur CONOIS cea e rire a cte P RA ee Good a e dp 8 16 8 8 Compiling the Application 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee eee 8 20 8 8 1 VPI Application CPU PD iue ei a ed Re eth Rn 8 20 8 8 1 1 EPROM Pilesi 25 a tI Pr Re d Ph OLA Kg NG 8 22 8 8 2 VPI2 CPU2 Main Applications Main subsystem 8 23 8 8 2 1 EPROM PUGS uir xa AN CORR REP OCA ER RD 8 24 8 8 3 iVPI VSP Main Applications Main subsystem 8 25 8 8 3 1 EPROM Fils curari oo 48 DERE CR CR ARTE 8 26 8 8 4 VPI2 CPU2 and iVPI VSP Comm Applications Comm SUDSVSIOI co Soh ath Mee even oed Qro ede raa o AA Kala hi 8 27 8 8 4 1 EPROM PIE3 i ocv ds a n p We that e Cede Vo dn oa i 8 27 8 8 5 CTC2v CTC2s NVSP CSEX4 Applications 8 28 8 8 5 1 EPRONNBIIGS S utra goo ed Kaiba eR or per AU da 8 29 8 8 6 Creating VPI Labels ros eh RECESSO RUD Y UR 8 29 8 9 AA S ba AR ies 8 31 8 9 1 Graphical Simulation y v eat GAG eee Rees CPE ANAN ROSE 8 31 8 9 2 Text SUNUIQUON 5 sre acd nace une d id ste RU Eod dare e a fd 8 31 8 10 Application Data Verification llle 8 32 8 10 1 Need for Verlicallon i RACER RR RN EER A 8 32 8 10 2 Verification Process 4 ee 8 34 8 10 3 Preparing to Run
46. combinations of open or closed relay contacts energize or de energize relay coils Parameters are comparable to the relay contacts complementing a variable in the equation is comparable to using the relay s back contact Equation results are comparable to the relay coils The state of the relay can be set so that it is normally up or energized normally closed or normally down or de energized normally open e Relay is normally up closed front contact is normally closed back contact is normally open Relay is normally down open front contact is normally open back contact is normally closed When the normally open or normally closed state of a relay is set all usages of the relay in the ladder logic all coils or contacts with the same name are updated to be consistent For example if relay ABC is set normally open all other instances of ABC are updated as well For arrays the relay state of each array element is updated independently For example if one instance of X 10 is made normally open all other instances of X 10 are updated as well but instances of X 11 are not 7 5 6 10 1 X Equation Variables If the normal state of an equation variable is set the resultant relay state depends on whether that variable is complemented or not i e whether the front or back contact is being used For example if the back contact is set normally closed the relay must be normally down normally open P2512A
47. correctly so that by executing the logic the VPI system operates safely in accordance with the rules of the transit or railroad authority The Application Data Verifier ADV output report provides a means to compare and verify equivalence between the input and the output application data However the Application Data Verifier neither determines the safety suitability of the Boolean expression list nor determines the validity of certain encoded VPI application data The input data to the ADV process must be verified for safety separately prior to the ADV process and the safety and suitability of the input data is the responsibility of the experienced signaling engineer The ADV does however issue warnings and error messages as a result of non vital data checking to alert the experienced signaling engineer to possible discrepancies Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment VERIFIER MUST BE DIFFERENT THAN DESIGNER The experienced signaling engineer responsible for verification the Checker or Verifier using the ADV checklist and creating the report shall be independent from the signaling engineer responsible for designing the Designer the VPI application Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P25
48. created and displayed in the Project Workspace s FileView The user must specify the names of these files This is done by entering Build Names Build names should be a single word no embedded blanks The Build Name entered when filling in system properties determines the root name of any files shared by all applications in a system For example if a build name of MySystem is entered a hardware file MySystem HDW is created describing the hardware used by the entire system MySystem HDW is shared by all applications in the system The Build Name entered in the editing view for a processor board such as CPU PD or CSEX determines the root name of the files for each individual application Table 7 4 shows how build names affect the names of the generated text files Table 7 4 Build Names Examples Graphics Build Names VPI System build name MySystem FileView Names Shared files MySystem xxx e g MySystem HDW CPU PD hardware board build name VitalApp VPI application folder name VitalApp Application files VitalApp xxx e g VitalApp VTL CPU II hardware board build name VitalApp build Main VPI2 Main application folder name VitalApp Application files VitalApp xxx e g VitalApp VTL CPU II hardware board build name VitalApp build Comm VPI2 Comm application folder name VitalAppCP Application files VitalAppCP xxx e g VitalAppCP VCC CSEX1 CSEX2 CSEX3 hardwa
49. e boardinfo is board specific information which is described in more detail below P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 8 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 7 3 Switches This section exists for products that have DIP switches or software switches The data format is BANK bankname size switchnumber1 switchname1 switchnumber2 switchname2 e bankname is the user name of the switch bank size is the number of switches in the switch bank e switchnumber is the switch number e Switchname is the name of the switch variable For example BANK DIP SWITCH 1 8 1 SW4 1 2 SW4 2 3 DIPSW2 3 4 DIPSW2 4 5 DIPSW2 5 6 DIPSW2 6 7 DIPSW2 7 8 DIPSW2 8 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 9 Alstom Signaling Inc 13 2 7 4 Board Information Simulator Reference The board information that appears depends on the board type Most boards have PROTOCOLS INPUTS or OUTPUTS subsections Table 13 1 Board Information Type Subsections ACO OUTPUTS CSEX1 CSEX2 CSEX3 CSEXA PROTOCOLS DBO OUTPUTS DI INPUTS LDO OUTPUTS NVI INPUTS NVO OUTPUTS NVTWC special board number protocol number SBO OUTPUTS TWC special board number protocol number 2SCPU PROTOCOL INPUTS OUTPUTS 48IN32RELAY INPUTS OUTPUTS 48IN32SNK INPUTS OUTPUTS 48IN32SRC INPUTS OUTPUTS 64RELAY OUTPUTS 96NEGIN INPUTS 96POSIN INPUTS P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 10 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Re
50. equations by range of statement numbers RUNMARK deselect all equations RUNMARK var name deselect equation by result name RUNMARK amp stmt num deselect equation by statement number RUNMARK amp start stmt num amp end stmt num deselect equations by range of statement numbers GEN file name generate relay file var name is the name of the result of an equation to be selected or deselected stmt num is the hexadecimal statement number of the equation to be selected or deselected start stmt num and end stmt num define a range of equations to be selected or deselected file name is the name of the relay file A standard extension of VCK is added Examples RUNMARK RMARK SWITCH1 OUT RMARK amp 1F RMARK amp 121 amp 12A GEN RELAYCKT P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 46 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference RUN Runs all applications for a specified period of time See CYC and SIM for running individual applications Format RUN mm MINUTES ss SECONDS where mm and ss are the minutes and seconds Example RUN 5 MINUTES RUNMARK See RMARK SET Sets the value of an integer variable in the current application Format SET var name value where var name is the name of a variable value is the numeric value to be set Example SET STEP COUNT 14 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 47 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference SETDATE Set the current simulation date This is the date that is shown in logic t
51. generic term VPI is used to refer to VPI VPI Il and iVPI except where their features diverge The terms VPI II VPI2 and CPU II CPU2 are used interchangeably throughout this manual Unless otherwise noted the term CSEX is used as a generic term for the non vital processor boards in the CSEXn series the original VPI CSEX board sometimes called CSEX1 and the newer VPI CSEX2 CSEX3 and CSEX4 boards The term CSEX1 is used when necessary to distinguish the original board from the newer ones User is defined in all instances as an experienced signaling engineer P2512A Rev J Aug 15 2 1 Alstom Signaling Inc General 2 2 SAFETY CAAPE software can be used to process a set of equations to develop a fail safe system MODIFICATION OF CAAPE AND CAA PROHIBITED No modification of CAAPE CAA or any of its component programs is allowed because any program change could compromise the safety performance of the system Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The responsibility for the underlying safety of the Vital logic equations and other Vital application data belongs to an experienced signaling engineer The signaling engineer is responsible for verifying that the interlocking control equations developed by the program correctly specify the intended operation in a fail safe manne
52. has 11 18 Simulator Options Simulation 222005 11 19 Simulator Options Relay File 11 20 Variables Dialog 269 424 tate Seton bs ote e ede 11 21 Setup History Dialog assan eorr ren e408 e548 de RETEIGSEWex 11 23 Variable Selector Dialog 5 00 620 c eee eee 11 24 Trace and Logging Dialog 5 Ka a ahit PGKA SEE 11 26 Track Plan View oues KANA a qnd V NU AG RAE wale ate 11 28 Track Plan Editing Toolbar aa DANI Re Ree 11 31 Device Properties General 000 cece eeeee 11 33 Device Properties Caption Properties 11 34 Device Properties Display Image 11 34 Control Panela s tede Ses eae de ad sequ Stet eee 11 41 Message Edit Dialog 22 2 ook obere et unen ET eed 11 43 Inputs Edit Dalag ea ote dis ee eof re NGA D SS ties 11 45 Outputs Edit Dialog maza ada oe cud antag dx etw 11 47 Switches Edi Dialog errei da nane e eia LEID get ie 11 49 Ladder Logie View nosnici vouetorbSi qu ides eee oe eo ee 11 52 Alstom Signaling Inc LIST OF TABLES Table No Title Page Table 1 1 Warning Safety Precaution Headings and Location 1 1 Table 2 1 Common Abbreviations and Glossary 2 05 2 4 Table 2 2 Related Publications List 2 0 000000 0 cece ee eee 2 7 Table 3 1 Using CAAP E me denoas ian ta ERU Doct ts eh ein t s Sepe See 3 3 Table 3 2 Computer and Minimum Operat
53. is entered Wire names must be no longer than 16 characters and can have no embedded blanks The character is allowed 6 4 USING WILDCARD CHARACTERS Several graphical features in CAAPE make use of text matching with wildcards e g for doing text searches Wildcards are specified by the question mark and the asterisk The question mark matches any single character while the asterisk matches any combination of zero or more characters For example consider BAT CAT BOAT PATH BATCH e The pattern AT matches the names BAT and CAT e The pattern AT matches the names BAT CAT and BOAT The pattern BAT matches BAT and BATCH P2512A Rev J Aug 15 6 4 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics SECTION 7 USING CAAPE GRAPHICS 7 1 GRAPHICAL WORK FLOW Graphical operation allows the user to configure a system by combining reusable components that are edited using a graphical approach This approach has the advantage of prompting for needed data instead of forcing the user to remember or look up a large number of text records and their formats The graphical process for creating a new system involves the steps in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Creating a New System Step Procedure Creating or importing the necessary graphical components Graphical 1 components are the graphical building blocks used to enter the application data 2 Editing the components Various graphical editing to
54. is the project name Table 12 2 Project Files File projname cpb Description Main project data file Not editable by user projname mms MMS project information file Not editable by user ComponentRegistry dat ComponentRegistry ids ComponentRegistry lok Component registry files contain data on graphical components used in this project Not editable by user The data for each graphical component is stored in two files a symbol file and a data file None of these files is directly editable by the user compname is the component name File Table 12 3 Component Files Description compname smb Component symbol file compname hdg Hardware component data file compname llg Ladder logic component data file compname mgg Message component data file compname Ipg LPC component data file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 3 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure Application configuration files are stored on a per application basis appname is the application name Table 12 4 Application Configuration Files File Description appname BV Vital Build Log database Stores graphical dependencies build status and configuration data for the application using information returned from CAA programs Not editable by the user appname BN Non vital Build Log database Stores graphical dependencies build status and co
55. message bit is set ON NVSER SENT INT PORT STRING ADDRESS INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Called when a message is sent from the serial port e PORT is the port number from 1 to max ADDRESS is the message address POSITION is the zero based position of the indication message in the list of indications assigned to the port e STATUS is a pointer to an internal variable returned to the simulator Set the variable True to acknowledge that the event was processed P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 27 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 5 3 TWC NVTWC Event Handlers ON NVTWC RECV ENABLE INT BOARD BOOL ENABLED Called when message receive on the board is enabled or disabled e BOARD is the board number from 1 to max ENABLED is True if enabled False if disabled ON NVTWC XMIT ENABLE INT BOARD BOOL ENABLED Called when message send on the board is enabled or disabled e PORT is the board number from 1 to max ENABLED is True if enabled False if disabled ON NVTWC RECEIVING INT BOARD INT CHANNEL INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Called when a message is about to be received on the board e BOARD is the board number from 1 to max CHANNEL is the channel number POSITION is the zero based position of the control message in the list of controls assigned to the board e STATUS is a pointer to an internal variable returned to the simulator Set the variable True to acknowledge that the event was
56. minimum of keystrokes or mouse clicks P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 30 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 3 3 Navigating the Logic View Window Logic statements are displayed from top to bottom Vertical and horizontal scroll bars can be used to move the display through the logic The arrow keys can be used to move the caret in small increments The Page Up and Page Down keys can be used to page the display through the logic If the Ctrl key is held down while these keys are used the display moves to the very start or the very end of the logic instead If the caret is currently over a statement the Home key moves it all the way to the statement s left and the End key moves it all the way to the statement s right Edit Go to Next and Edit Go to Previous items are available in the main menu and the toolbar to move the display from one statement to another Equivalent buttons exist on the logic toolbar 7 5 3 4 Selecting Logic Items Some operations such as Delete can only be performed on logic items that have been selected by the user Selected items are specially marked on the display A single item in the logic can be selected by left or right clicking over it or by moving the caret over it and pressing the spacebar or using the Edit Select menu item Multiple items of certain types can be selected by clicking over each with the Ctrl key held down e Multiple statements Multiple branches Multiple logic ele
57. not reached e g if doing CYC NOCHG and equation results never stop changing Formats MAX mm MINUTES ss SECONDS set maximum time MAX FOREVER turn off cycling limit where mm and ss are the minutes and seconds of the maximum cycling time This period is in simulation time not real time Examples MAX 5 MINUTES 10 SECONDS MAX FOREVER MON Starts a monitor of the specified logic statement in the current application The simulator outputs trace information for the statement when it is executed Formats MON var name MON amp stmt num where var name is the name of a result of the equation on which to set the monitor stmt num is the hexadecimal statement number of the statement on which to set the monitor Examples MON LAMP OUT2 MON amp 1F4 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 42 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference MSGINF MSGINT Sets the state of a bit in an input message Under some conditions this may be better than setting the input variable using TRUE or NTRUE because the variable value does not revert to the message bit value when messages are evaluated Formats MSGINF var name turn message bit False MSGINT var name turn message bit True where var name is the name of the variable associated with the message bit Example MSGINT 1W CTRL IN NFBRK See FBRK NLOAD See LOAD NTRUE Sets a variable in the current application False Format FALSE var name where var name is the name of a v
58. operations in the application logic Two important categories of function statements are VPI Library statements and the advanced programming statements in CTC2 These statements are just entered as text and are displayed that way in the ladder logic editing screen When function statements such as IF ELSE or WHILE enclose blocks of statements the enclosed logic block must end with an END BLOCK function statement 7 5 2 Caret Positioning A flashing caret symbol indicates the current active editing position As in a text editor the caret position can be changed by clicking on the screen using the arrow keys etc When the caret is placed over a display item on the screen various editing functions are enabled For example when the caret is placed over a branch on a Boolean equation insertion of parallel branches and parameters is possible The editing functions allowed at the current caret position are enabled in the main and popup menus and the logic toolbar and hotkeys for performing the functions are enabled as well P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 29 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 3 General Editing Techniques 7 5 3 1 Using Hotkeys and the Hotkey Bar Hotkeys are available for various editing functions depending on the caret position The Hotkey Bar lists the hotkeys that are available to use on the data at the current caret location Its contents change as the caret is moved over different types of logic display items
59. or at specific points in the script The script can be paused at specified points so the user can view the results so far or perform operations not in the script before resuming 11 15 4 1 Non Interactive Mode To execute a script go to Execute in the script s popup menu The commands in the script file are executed 11 15 4 2 Interactive Mode Go to Execute Interactively in the script s popup menu The Interactive Script Control dialog is displayed Select whether to update the user interface display continuously If continuous update is not selected the simulator can still be made to update its display at specific points in the script by embedding UPDATE records in the script file Additional options available are Display text strings in the program s status bar by embedding SHOWTEXT commands in the script Cause script execution to temporarily stop by embedding PAUSE commands in the script Click the Run button to start executing the script If a PAUSE record is encountered in the script execution temporarily stops and a Paused message is displayed in the status box Click Run to continue or Exit to quit 11 15 5 Removing Scripts To remove a script from the project go either to Remove or Remove and Delete in the script s popup menu Remove removes the script from the project but does not delete its file Remove and Delete removes the script and also delete its file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 62 Alstom Signaling Inc U
60. port 1 CALL GET NVSERSP POSN 1 0 2 NEWVAL Function SET NVSERSP ADDR port address check address bits message bit new value Set the value of the specified bit in a special message specified by its serial port and address e port is the serial port from 1 to max e address is a string giving the message address e check address bits is TRUE if the number of address bits is significant e message bit is the message bit where 1 is the first bit e new value is a Boolean variable or a constant which contains the new value of the special message bit For example Clear the second bit of the special message with address 1101 on port 2 CALL SET NVSERSP ADDRY 2 1101 TRUE 2 FALSE Function SET NVSERSP POSN port position message bit new value Set the value of the specified bit in a special message specified by its serial port and position e port is the serial port from 1 to max e position is the zero based message position e message bit is the message bit where 1 is the first bit e new value is a Boolean variable or a constant which contains the new value of the special message bit For example Clear the third bit of the second special message on port 1 CALL SET NVSERSP POSN 2 1 3 FALSE P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 21 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 4 3 Non Vital Serial Indication Transmit Functions These functions allow the user to transmit data from the specified non vital serial indi
61. qoo doeet d bote 84 pa Ga reete 12 3 Table 12 3 Component FIles uc eme rette RC EX Qno ES aY 12 3 Table 12 4 Application Configuration Files llle 12 4 Table 12 5 Compiler Input Files z 552224 IE AEIN bn RUD X Les 12 5 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 XV Alstom Signaling Inc LIST OF TABLES Table No Title Page Table 12 6 Other Input Files 0 0002 eee 12 6 Table 12 75 Report Files 23 cs i uena meted ld ees EE GER Paste ode 12 7 Table 12 8 Output Files ASCII hex Format aa 12 8 Table 12 9 Miscellaneous and Temporary Files a 12 10 Table 12 10 Label Files oorr e aod ees ou AN tea oboe tas 12 11 Table 12 11 Compiler Input Files 0 12 12 Table 12 12 Report Files 2 25 44283 ks KA kaha kk KAMANG eee eed 12 13 Table 12 13 Output Files ASCII Hex Format aanne 12 13 Table 12 14 Miscellaneous and Temporary Files 00055 12 13 Table 12 15 Simulator Files uctor be eer BKA APR PP eS 2 12 14 Table 13 1 Board Information 000 eee eee 13 10 Table 13 2 Message Types ee PG BNG e 3 ce xe mE PP NG EE 13 14 Table 13 3 Project Level Commands eee eee 13 53 Table 13 4 Application Level Commands 0 eee 13 55 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 xvi Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions SECTION 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1 1 SAFETY PRECAUTION MATRIX Warning safety precautions are presented in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Warning Safety P
62. s caption can be moved relative to the device by dragging it to a new position When the device is moved its caption is also moved at the same distance relative to it 11 9 3 8 Setting Track Plan Size Ordinarily track plan size is determined by the layout of its devices on the screen However it may be necessary to force the track plan to be larger than the available Track Plan View s window size Go to Track Plan Layout in the main menu The Track Plan Layout dialog is displayed Use this dialog to set the minimum width and height of the track plan 11 9 4 Copying Entire Track Plans Entire track plans can be imported from another project into the current one and then edited as needed The Text Replace feature can then be used to modify the names of the variables assigned to the track plan devices To create a new track plan and copy the contents of an existing track plan file to it go to Clone in the source track plan s popup menu in the Project Contents window The source track plan must be closed for cloning to be allowed Enter the name of the new track plan and click OK A new track plan is created and added to the project and the contents of the source track plan s file are copied to it To create a new track plan and copy the contents of an open track plan editing view to it go to File Save As in the track plan view s main menu The track plan must be open in Build mode for the operation to be allowed Enter the name of the ne
63. s caption is changed to More Clicking the button makes the search options visible again P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 42 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics The Replace tab is used to replace logic text Find and Replace gt x Find Replace Go To Find What v Find Next Replace With Cancel Replace More Replace All Figure 7 20 Logic Find and Replace Dialog Replace The Go To tab can be used to move the display to a statement having the specified statement number result name or group name Find and Replace x Find Replace Go To Go to what Enter statement number Go Statement number Cancel Result Group Record Figure 7 21 Logic Find and Replace Dialog Go To P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 43 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 10 Defining Constants Where the logic type supports the use of constants go to the Tools Constants main menu item to display a dialog for defining them 7 5 11 Declaring Internal Variables Go to Tools Internal Variables in the main menu The Internal Variables dialog is displayed CPU2 CSEX4_V Internal Variables p Current Result Seif Latched Timer Name MIN TICK Add 53 1NWC DI 1NWCP Figure 7 22 Internal Variables Dialog Select the tab of the internal variable category Current Result Self Latched or Timer in Figure 7 22 Enter or select a variable in the Name control and click the
64. safe functionality of the VPI system Furthermore verify the correctness means that the signaling engineer 1 is required to compare the input and output data files to verify the CAA has operated correctly and 2 must test the VPI application in its intended environment before it can be placed in revenue service Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment VPI APPLICATION MUST BE VALIDATION TESTED Prior to revenue service validation testing must confirm all VPI application logic is correct and consistent with application requirements Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 32 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files VPI APPLICATION MUST BE FIELD TESTED Field testing of a VPI application is required before placing the location into revenue service The customer s testing plan and safety plan define the testing requirements for the VPI application Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment ADV INPUT DATA MUST BE VERIFIED SEPARATELY PRIOR TO ADV PROCESS Vital system operation requires that the Boolean equations in the Vital application logic must be written
65. serial protocols and data logger are installed on a non vital board only if specific protocols or options have been selected by the signaling engineer System software is identified in various ways depending on the type of board Vital system software in VPI is identified by an Alstom part number e g 40025 366 00 The Vital system software files of a given version are stored in a CAA subdirectory along with the programs that use them Non vital system software files have Alstom part numbers but they are typically identified by a version letter and number e g DT8 protocol version F37 Non vital system software files are stored in the Ctcfiles subdirectory of the CAAPE 3 2 3 CAAPE Projects and their Contents CAAPE manages application data through the use of projects A project is a collection of files describing one or more applications Some of these files are meant to be directly accessible by the signaling engineer others are for internal use and are readable only by CAAPE A CAAPE project is often used to configure all the applications in a single VPI or CenTraCode Il s system but CAAPE imposes no limits on how many applications can be contained in a project The main project file extension cpb organizes the project contents including the references to the other files in the project and the options selected by the signaling engineer When CAAPE opens a project it reads the main cpb file to load the file references and option sele
66. specified bit in a special message e board is the TWC NVTWC board e channel is the TWC NVTWC channel e pos is the zero based position of the message in the list of special messages assigned to the channel e message bit is the message bit where 1 is the first bit e return value is the name of a Boolean variable which gets the value of the special message bit For example Get the fourth bit of the third special message for TWC board 1 channel 2 CALL GET NVTWCSP 1 2 2 4 NEWVAL Function SET NVTWCSPY board channel pos message bit new value Sets the value of the specified bit in a special message e board is the TWC NVTWC board e channel is the TWC NVTWC channel e pos is the zero based position of the message in the list of special messages assigned to the channel e message bit is the message bit where 1 is the first bit e new value is a Boolean variable or a constant which contains the new value of the special message bit For example Clear the fourth bit of the third special message for TWC board 1 channel 2 CALL SET NVTWCSPY 1 2 2 4 FALSE P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 23 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 4 5 Utility Functions Function STRING COMPARE string1 string2 are equal Does a case insensitive compare of two strings e string1 and string2 are strings or string variables to be compared e are equalis a returned Boolean value which is True if the two strings are the same Fo
67. system operation requires that the Boolean equations in the Vital application logic must be written correctly so that by executing the logic the VPI system operates safely in accordance with the rules of the transit or railroad authority The Application Data Verifier ADV output report provides a means to compare and verify equivalence between the input and the output application data However the Application Data Verifier neither determines the safety suitability of the Boolean expression list nor determines the validity of certain encoded VPI application data The input data to the ADV process must be verified for safety separately prior to the ADV process and the safety and suitability of the input data is the responsibility of the experienced signaling engineer The ADV does however issue warnings and error messages as a result of non vital data checking to alert the experienced signaling engineer to possible discrepancies Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 5 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions VERIFIER MUST BE DIFFERENT THAN DESIGNER The experienced signaling engineer responsible for verification the Checker or Verifier using the ADV checklist and creating the report shall be independent from the signaling engineer responsible for designing the Designer the VPI appli
68. text based logic format its purpose is to specify the behavior of a system how the system responds to the various types of inputs it receives and when it activates or deactivates its various types of outputs However ladder logic has the advantage of being a more visual format and represents the logic in a way that is more in keeping with traditional relay based diagrams Ladder logic consists of a series of statements Which types of statements are available in a given set of ladder logic depends on the type of application The general editing process involves e Adding Boolean equations and other types of statements and setting their properties For Boolean equations defining the results and variables and their logical structure e Declaring any internal variables in the logic Internal variables are variables that do not represent physical hardware I O or message bits but rather internal data used in the equations e Defining constants when applicable Constants are meaningful names that can be used to stand for numeric values For example the constant MAX COUNT could be defined as standing for a value of 10 and when the statement IF COUNT lt MAX COUNT is executed the COUNT variable would be compared to 10 For context sensitive help on the logic screen and its dialogs press the F1 key P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 25 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics The sample logic editing screen in Figure 7 14 shows a co
69. the ADV 00 8 35 8 10 4 Running the ADV s aUe RARE BAG ag PRA ERR ES 8 35 8 10 5 Consolidation Reports P38 ux a a ECRIRE RERO CAR 8 36 8 10 6 Graphical Logic Verification A A A A 8 36 8 10 7 Note on Sum of Products Format a 8 36 8 11 Programming Memory Devices 2 eee e 8 37 BIET EPROM FICS goner e eho RIS RE e RE LE Pa aa is 8 37 8 11 1 1 MPIVS P s soi wetter bem e oce ctp EO PR KN E EORR 8 37 8 11 1 2 IMPENVS P ata natae RR DBA AA RR 8 38 8 11 1 3 VPP OPUS oes Daan pay mam Ea tre Neo lec 8 38 8 11 1 4 MPG SEX iactu ABALA BARS KAG aac Related 8 39 8 11 1 5 VEO PUTES fhe see donc dem em OU BA Ada te RR DER ER LONG 8 39 8 11 1 6 VIS GIU a a it drm pah APA BAIL EE CE ee d 8 40 8 11 1 7 MISI MSG a tt atid Bh RI Tende ote niacin e OS aae 8 40 8 11 1 8 VPI CSEX1 CSEX2 CSEXS Vh mI aika ha a ERN 8 41 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 vi Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 8 11 1 9 CenTraGode TES ira A re RC rae c oe HA 8 41 8 11 2 EPROM Programming ius ise o cog hgh ORI RQAUR AUR BER ERE 8 42 G9 Download s o sen eee ode un MR Et en e Ron ec DRAG 8 42 8 11 4 CHECKSUM Valugs s nes DRE Pd EP RA NOR DER Ry pa 8 42 8 12 Managing Application Files llle 8 43 8 12 1 Removing Application Files 0 8 43 8 12 2 Renaming Application Files 2 8 43 8 12 3 Copying Application Files to Another Location
70. they can be anchored to various positions within the program s main frame window and can be undocked and floated anywhere on the screen The track plan and logic windows in the edit area follow Windows multiple document interface conventions they can be minimized maximized tiled or cascaded P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 6 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 7 MANAGING PROJECTS 11 7 1 Creating a Project To create a new Graphical Simulator project go to File New Project in the main menu A Project Information dialog is displayed Enter project information and click OK A new project is created in the specified directory A simulator project is created automatically when simulation is requested for selected applications in CAAPE The project file is located in the same directory as the CAAPE project 11 7 2 Opening an Existing Project Open an existing project by going to File Open Project or one of the Most Recently Used files in the main menu 11 7 3 Editing Project Information To enter new descriptive information on an open project Goto Project Project Information in the main menu then e Select Project Information from the project s popup menu in the Project Contents Window The Project Information dialog is displayed Edit the information and click OK P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 7 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 7 4 Adding an Application When simulatio
71. through the CAAPE s FileView Steps 6 through 9 are the same whether the data was entered graphically or directly as text files the graphical approach can thus be considered a more user friendly front end for creating the text files See Using Application Files for details on using application files P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 2 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 2 CREATING AND MANAGING GRAPHICAL COMPONENTS 7 2 1 Component Types Hardware components represent the physical hardware for a product the chassis and its boards In editing hardware the user specifies what boards are placed in the chassis the variable names of any I O ports the names of the field wires connected to the ports and the various options needed for operation of the boards Message components represent the various types of messages sent and received by boards in the hardware In editing messages the user specifies message options and the variable names of the source and or destination message bits Logic components represent the Vital or non vital logic running on a processor board In editing logic the user writes equations and other statements that control how the application behaves Link Protocol Command LPC components are used to store configuration options for certain serial communications protocols In editing LPC components the user specifies what protocol specific options are used when messages are sent or received 7 2 2 Component Files
72. tie specific variables to the processing of selected messages The simulator recognizes when certain events occur in message processing and allows the user to specify what actions are performed in response to those events To specify how the simulator responds to message processing events select an input or output message in the Project Contents window and click the Events item in its popup menu A Message Events dialog is displayed Using this dialog select the message events that are important to the serial protocol in use and specify how the simulator responds to them Use protocol specific simulation logic files to simulate protocol operation See Section 11 10 3 Simulating Serial Protocols for more information P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 27 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 9 TRACK PLAN SETUP 11 9 1 Overview Track Plans are graphical representations of an interlocking and its field devices such as tracks switches and signals Multiple track plans can be added to a Graphical Simulator project A sample track plan is shown below E test3 Build a NAWANG LALO NWCODESN yox ee be eo 17 0 ugs a E LL A Ma MEE 9 0 2 2 SWPLDI NWCODESOUT dl M TQ MED mee 1345678 Hs as TE EE Wo SPD m eS GA si WBO lolol Je 14 NWT 1NWP DI 1RWP DI 3NWP DI Figure 11 15 Track Plan View P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 28 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graph
73. to enter the application data When the application data file is edited add the application to the simulator project See Section 13 2 Application Data File Format for details P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 10 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 SIMULATOR SETUP 11 8 1 Changing Simulation Speed and Session Date Time The Graphical Simulator does not execute application logic in real time Depending on computer speed application size and other factors one second of simulated time may be more or less than one actual second of real time For small applications the simulator may cycle much faster than real time an application that cycles once a second in real time may cycle several times a second in simulation This may be undesirable if it causes events to occur faster than they can be tracked visually One remedy is to capture the variable changes in the History Window and examine them after they have occurred Another is to slow down the simulator so that events occur more slowly in real time To change perceived simulator speed go to Setup Simulator Time in the main menu to open the Session Date and Time dialog Session Date and Time m Date and Time Date Time 11 23 2005 9 14 49 AM m Simulation Speed Slower J Faster L Cancel Figure 11 3 Session Date and Time Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 11 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator
74. unoccupied to occupied and the appropriate value is sent back to the associated input variable in the application In a more complex example if the simulator sets the Reverse Call output for a switch device the switch waits until a certain time has elapsed and then moves to the reverse position Its display on the track plan screen changes to show its new position and the associated Reverse Position input variable is updated in the application The user could access a popup menu for the device and select a menu entry forcing the switch to stay out of correspondence or holding it in a particular position the position inputs are then forced to behave incorrectly and the user could test the error detection features of the application logic P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 29 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 9 2 A Adding a Track Plan To create a new track plan and add it to the project go to File New Track Plan in the main menu e New Track Plan in the popup menu of the Track Plans folder of the Project Contents window The Track Plan dialog is displayed Enter the track plan name and an optional description and then click OK An entry is added to the project but the track plan file is not created until the track plan is edited for the first time Track Plan files are always stored in the project directory The root name of the track plan file is the track plan name a standard SCN extension is added when th
75. where var name is the name of the variable associated with the input flash rate is the flash rate in milliseconds Very fast rates may not simulate accurately rates in the hundreds of milliseconds are more stable Examples HWINON 1W DI HWINFLASH FLASHIN NVI 500 LCLOSE See LOPEN P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 40 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference LOAD NLOAD Sets or clears the load current present condition for the specified output in the current application Formats LOAD var name set load current present NLOAD var name set load current absent where var name is the name of an output variable Examples LOAD 1GE SBO NLOAD 1GE SBO LOG ON LOG OFF See LOPEN LOPEN LOG LCLOSE Controls simulation logging for the current application Trace and other display information is saved to the log file as the simulator runs See PROJLOG for turning logging on or off for all applications at once Formats LOPEN og file name open a log file LOG ON start logging LOG OFF stop logging without closing the log file LCLOSE stop logging and close the log file where log file name is the name of the file A standard extension of VLG is added Examples LOPEN SIMLOG1 LOG ON LOG OFF LCLOSE P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 41 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference MAX Set the maximum time for which any logic can be executed This is meant to prevent logic cycling from continuing forever if an expected limit is
76. 014 09 39 30 3 15 ssmith x Name E239 STANDBY Hardware Hardware P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 12 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects 5 6 SETTING PROJECT OPTIONS Project options apply to the currently open CAAPE project and are saved in the project file Select Options Project Options in the main menu The Project Options dialog is displayed zi Generate MMS File on Compile Cancel Figure 5 7 Project Options These project options are available e When Generate MMS File on Compile is enabled CAAPE automatically generates an MMS data file whenever an application is compiled This ensures that the MMS file stays in sync with the latest application data produced by a compile The user can also manually generate an MMS file at any time see below The sync process is performed by the MMS Editor MMS imports the mms file generated by CAAPE Within MMS Editor the user must run the Import From CAAPE Wizard for the first build or Synchronize to CAAPE for a changed application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 13 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects 5 7 GENERATING DATA FOR MMS MMS the Maintenance Management System is an Alstom utility for monitoring and managing diagnostic and maintenance data from systems in real time MMS requires extensive information on the system being monitored This information is created for individual applications when they are compiled in CAAPE the information can
77. 1 5 2 Setting Track Occupancy llle 11 51 11 11 5 3 Setting Device Modes AA 11 51 11 11 5 4 DEVICE TIMING oux deem RA ts ia Ven alee AA 11 51 11 12 Usi g Ladder Logie is 34 6 necs a deag pa aa e ose 8 a 11 52 11 12 1 Changing Display Formatos dot ARE BAKAL REE ERN 11 53 11 122 Selecting Logic Elements 0 0 00 cece cece en neee 11 53 11 12 2 1 Moving Within the Logic View llis 11 54 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 ix Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 11 12 2 2 Finding Specific Statements 11 54 11 12 3 Using Bookmarks su aus be hn Kan s Wh pha o cede RRS 11 55 11 12 4 PopupMMenus vs 22 i eux m Rut Ree a aie Shae Ree RS 11 55 TT 2 9 Printing Ladder Logic 42 mGA KKK Ra ARIA EEG OLDE SES 11 55 11 13 Using the Watch Window isla epe xut x xe Rr Ren 11 56 11 44 Using the History Window 2 sees IRIS 11 58 Tigo LUSIN SOMpIS oce dod erm ortos ona ta Rana aaa a ana asd ais ed d 11 60 TT T5 L Adding Seis x iam onus a ABA PERO ACC ON SET AT REGN CR EE RR 11 60 11 15 25 Editing SOTpls usas a e ec d Gr Nn e DeC NANG 11 60 11 15 3 Using Command Capture liliis 11 61 TT T54 ExeculinQ Scripts uod 66 sot V p BG EP Re EE E E S 11 62 11 15 4 1 Non Interactive Mode AA 11 62 11 15 4 2 Interactive Mode vorn BAKA PD NG ER RRS 11 62 11 15 15 REMOVING SODDIS oos Lv de wes a rex eh c Na 11 62 11 16 Using Smapsholss sso
78. 12A Rev J Aug 15 8 33 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 10 2 Verification Process Verification of the compile is done by running an Application Data Verifier ADV program and examining report files In general the verification process is performed as in Table 8 6 User is defined in all instances as an experienced signaling engineer Table 8 6 Verification Process Step Procedure Compile the source files 4 The VPI Compiler program creates PROM files in doing so it condenses the user entered application data into a set of numeric values and outputs these values to the VPI Consolidation Report VCR file Run the Application Data Verifier The ADV program reads the data structures from the PROM files and reconstructs the user entered data It condenses this data into another set of 2 numeric values and outputs these values to the ADV Consolidation Report ACR file It also saves detailed information on the reconstructed user data e g listings of any Vital messages and I O boards in the Verification Listing LSV file If the ADV detects any outright errors in the contents of the data structures it displays error messages and saves them in the L SV file Check the LSV file for reported errors 3 If none are found this shows that no errors were detected in the PROM files However it does not yet prove that the PROM data accurately reflects what the user entered Compare the VCR and
79. 13 6 Script File Format for script file instructions P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 60 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 15 3 Using Command Capture Command capture causes certain simulator commands to be automatically saved in a designated script file It can be used to capture a sequence of commands to be executed again later on To designate a script file for command capture highlight it in the Project Contents Window and go to Open Capture in its popup menu Commands are now automatically captured in the file Command capture can be temporarily turned off to stop capturing commands without having to close the file Use Project Command Capture in the main menu or the Enable Disable Capture button on the toolbar to toggle capture mode To close a command capture script file highlight it in the Project Contents Window and go to Close Capture in its popup menu The file can now be executed similar to any other script file in order to perform its stored commands P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 61 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 15 4 Executing Scripts Two modes of script execution are available non interactive and interactive In non interactive mode all script commands are executed and then the user interface display is updated at the very end In interactive mode the user controls when the user interface display is updated The display can be made to update continuously as the script runs
80. 204 bene cals 10 6 SECTION 11 Using the Graphical Simulator 11 1 11 1 INMOOUGHON c a5 kak kA KAG RA eod umi Ed Se ete awed SU AGE es 11 1 11 1 1 The Graphical Simulator dr Ree RR acea 11 1 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 vii Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 11 1 2 Why Perform Simulation a haaa aaa bak aaa kah KA ERES 11 2 11 1 3 Text Based vs Graphical Simulators AA 11 2 11 2 Preparing for Simulation eser 11 3 Ves Simulator Projects sse ini a ei ios ote Gs GNG BKA Roe Dn nof BASIN 11 3 11 4 Starting the Simulator 34 2 ack bk hada Pein sie ERU E NAAN etes 11 4 11 5 Default Edito 3 ooi hepate RE ae ere ere are 11 4 11 6 Simulator User Interface 0c ccs 11 5 11 7 Managing Projects auus Sees pee Oraa ERES bee ee te 11 7 11 7 1 Creating a ProjeCt cna pak eR NRG EERE ERAS RR 11 7 11 7 2 Opening an Existing Project 0000 ccc eee e en eeeee 11 7 11 7 3 Editing Project Information cece even eenee 11 7 11 7 4 Adding an Application osc cack heck Ra e era 11 8 11 7 5 Removing an Application soe oa eat Ra CE OPE KG CRAT ERR 11 8 11 7 6 Importing Data from Another Project A U 11 9 11 7 7 Creating an Application Data File Manually 11 10 11 8 simulator Selup cen eae abes tir KA NA TEE 11 11 11 8 1 Changing Simulation Speed and Session Date Time 11 11 11 8 2 Linking Messages and Hardwar
81. 25 shows a Ladder Logic View with two equations visible The first equation has a breakpoint set indicated by the round dot to the left of the equation Drop Line symbols have been selected 215 x Statement 003F 6 10RC F 6 11RC F GAS TE F OFF STICK RESET F Statement 0040 TIMER INACTIVE TIMEOUT 0 00 30 000 VRDFRNT DI F 7 5RC F 7 8RC F 7AS F OFF STICK RESET F 7AS TE F Figure 11 25 Ladder Logic View P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 52 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 12 1 Changing Display Format To change the display font of ladder logic text go to View Font in the main menu The new setting is saved in the registry and used for all ladder logic views To change the symbol type go to View Symbols in the main menu The new setting is saved in the registry and used for all ladder logic views To zoom the ladder logic view in or out go to View Zoom in the main menu 11 12 2 Selecting Logic Elements Logic elements can be selected by Left clicking over a single item e Holding down the Ctrl key and left clicking over multiple compatible items e g multiple statements If an operation such as logging is done on multiple selected items it is performed in the same order as the items were selected Pressing the left mouse button down and dragging a selection rectangle around one or more compatible items Right clicking over an empty area on the display to get the
82. 2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 8 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Mnrliile 7 Figure 7 4 New Hardware Module The new module contains rows of numbered squares at top and bottom These are the slots where boards are placed into the module Clicking on one of these selects the slot and the board in the slot if any Clicking outside any slot or board selects the entire module When a module is added it is edited by setting its properties and populating it with boards Figure 7 5 shows a module that is populated with boards All slots except for slot 17 are occupied The Code Rate Generator CRG board in slot 14 is selected The VRD board in slot 8 is shown taking up two slots P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 9 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics I YpiHardware Queens1A Module 1 anol ovoj mo lt Z mno Oo lt kZ no rocZ Co TI a o Jc Li L5 i6 pir E E E Figure 7 5 Hardware Module with Boards An entire module can be cut or copied to the Clipboard and pasted into an empty module location in this or another hardware component Right click over the module to select it and select Copy or Cut from its popup menu select the module and go to Edit Copy or Edit Cut in the main menu or click the Cut or Copy toolbar buttons Now select an empty module location Right click on the location and select Paste Module from the popup menu go to Edit Paste in the main menu or click the P
83. 2A Rev J Aug 15 3 4 Alstom Signaling Inc Introduction 3 3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 3 3 1 Computer and Operating System Table 3 2 Computer and Minimum Operating System Requirements Description Requirement Operating System Windows XP SP3 Windows 7 32 bit and Windows 7 64 bit SP1 Windows 7 operating systems are supported in CAAPE 019B and later and AlsDload 14 00 and later RAM 64 MB minimum CPU Pentium or compatible Hard Disk 400 MB available Input Device Keyboard and mouse Display SVGA 800 x 600 Ports Serial Port COM port USB 2 0 or USB 3 0 with Microsoft 3 0 stack Other CD ROM P2512A Rev J Aug 15 3 5 Alstom Signaling Inc Introduction 3 3 2 Additional Hardware An EPROM eraser and programmer suitable for use with the installable EPROMs in VPI and CenTraCode Il s are required The programmer must be capable of loading files in Intel Hex ASCII format CPU Il CSEX4 VSP and NVSP boards do not need an EPROM eraser or programmer 3 3 3 Additional Software A text editor such as Windows Notepad is required for editing the various text files used and produced by CAAPE REDP the Relay Equivalent Drawing Package is a separate Alstom utility that can optionally be used to output application logic in graphical format to a printer or DXF files The Alstom part number is 51795 066 02 Table 3 3 REDP Requirements Description Requirement Operating System Wind
84. 7 VSP CPU2 Comm Run Controls accessible from FileView seller 8 17 Figure 8 8 NVSP CSEXA Run Controls accessible from ProjectView or FileView 8 17 Figure 8 9 Graphical Logic Print Page Setup Options 8 46 Figure 8 10 Graphical Logic Print Page Setup Sizes 8 47 Figure 8 11 Graphical Logic Print Page Setup Headers 8 47 Figure 10212 CRO MIN iea date e tore Gad a 3 24 aE oh enr Ee te KGG 10 2 Figure 10 2 CAA Packages Browser 10 4 Figure 11 1 Graphical Simulator Main Window lessen 11 5 Figure 11 2 Project Import Dialog 20 c eee eee ee 11 9 Figure 11 3 Session Date and Time Dialog llle 11 11 Figure 11 4 Message Links Dialog aaa 11 13 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 xiii Alstom Signaling Inc Figure No Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 Figure 11 8 Figure 11 9 Figure 11 10 Figure 11 11 Figure 11 12 Figure 11 13 Figure 11 14 Figure 11 15 Figure 11 16 Figure 11 17 Figure 11 18 Figure 11 19 Figure 11 20 Figure 11 21 Figure 11 22 Figure 11 23 Figure 11 24 Figure 11 25 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 xiv LIST OF FIGURES Title Page I O Links Daloge 2 5 Sia ote ato Ales ata dad aan aED 11 15 Simulator Options Break Points a 11 16 Simulator Options Monitors ee eee 11 17 Simulator Options SKIDS 24 534 ber Pio died da DR ARA
85. 8 43 8 13 Printing Logic Graphically 42 3 tA RRERYTe EE 8 44 8 13 1 Graphical Simulator ce RAY pw ee en on RA ae 8 44 8 13 2 Import Logic Files into CAAPE Logic Component 8 45 6 13 3 Logic Print WINKOW x ax ere os Rt RR AN a ERR 8 45 8 13 3 1 Opening the Logic Print Window A 8 45 8 13 3 2 Print Page Setup eos vi uie uda ea ee 8 46 8 13 3 3 Printing and Print Preview 00 a 8 48 8 13 3 4 Logic Information File 2 RR Re ce e e 8 48 8 13 4 Relay Equivalent Drawing Package REDP 8 49 SECTION 9 Application Change Process 2 cece cece eens 9 1 9 1 Change Process 2o 2d ees xe Gad p oed hotte ag Ee Reed Beas es 9 1 9 2 ADV COMP Are es nan saga NA NA are e Gu RR RT A SR SLATE E RUD IR 9 9 9 2 1 Preparing to Use ADV Compare 0 a 9 9 9 2 2 Running ADV Compare ues ep y uh AR OE XR EORR CELER 9 9 SECTION 10 Configuration Control cece eee 10 1 10 1 ibfOQ HUC HOLE 2 4 2 43 3690 usta oes PAA ted ai e th eR d e od 10 1 10 2 Application Datas c aka EP E 6A SU eA Rd 3 Sa gets 10 1 10 2 1 Graphical Components 00000 eee etn n enna 10 1 10 2 2 Configuration Report Files 00000 c cece eens 10 2 10 2 3 Revision HISIOD V cy ev E hs Talia See oe es aio eee 10 3 10 24 Compile Date and Time 0 0 ccc ees 10 3 10 3 CAPAC WEISIONS os Bana eo oot be CER S ee did 10 4 10 4 CAAPE Revision Info Report 044 0100 85008
86. ADV on successful compile If Generate ADV information is selected this option runs the ADV upon a successful compile I O Label Information P2512A Rev J Aug 15 The Generate option allows the LBL file to be created in a compile The Target Device selects what type of label file is created from the LBL file For VPI CAA packages that support this feature the Label Comments button displays a Label Annotations dialog for creating or editing a file that specifies user comment text to be added to the I O label the next time it is generated 8 18 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files ADV Compare run controls are used to set ADV Compare report options for VPI or VSP applications only Table 8 3 ADV Compare Run Controls Run Control Description Boolean Equations List simply lists certain file elements side by side Compare actively compares the file elements and mark differences Symbols List simply lists certain file elements side by side Compare actively compares the file elements and mark differences Page Header Printed Prints a header CenTraCode Il v run controls are used to set compile options for CSEX applications only Table 8 4 CenTraCode II v Run Controls Run Control Description No Error Code Disables generation of array error checking code in logic equations CenTraCode Il s run controls are used to set compile options for CenTraCode II s appli
87. ALSTOM ACCUTRACK PRODUCT SOLUTIONS Computer Aided Application Programming Environment CAAPE User Manual Copyright 2006 2007 2008 2009 2013 2014 2015 Alstom Signaling Inc READ MANUAL BEFORE USE Read this manual before using this software Keep this manual in a safe location for future reference Failure to follow the instructions presented in this manual can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment User Manual P2512A ALSTOM ACCUTRACK PRODUCT SOLUTIONS Computer Aided Application Programming Environment CAAPE User Manual Copyright 2006 2007 2008 2009 2013 2014 2015 Alstom Signaling Inc READ MANUAL BEFORE USE Read this manual before using this software Keep this manual in a safe location for future reference Failure to follow the instructions presented in this manual can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment User Manual Alstom Signaling Inc P2512A Rev J August 2015 Printed in U S A LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES P2512A Computer Aided Application Programming Environment CAAPE User Manual ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE March 2006 CURRENT REVISION AND DATE Rev J August 2015 PAGE CHANGE OR REVISION LEVEL Cover Aug 15 Title page Aug 15 Preface Aug 15 i through xvi Aug 15 1 1 through 1 12 Au
88. Add System to Project from its popup menu When a request is made to create a hardware system the System Wizard is displayed to help guide the user through the steps of creating the system All the steps available in the Wizard do not need user input just click Nextto go through all the screens and finally click Finish The system is created and is still available to enter data at a later time However the System Wizard provides more guidance than using the normal system editing process To make the best use of the System Wizard create a hardware component and assign its boards before creating the hardware system that uses it In the System Documentation page descriptive data is entered for the system System Documentation j x Enter general system documentation system description customer and contract information etc Z Description Contract Number Contract N ame Customer Name Equipment Location Program Number Figure 7 26 System Wizard System Documentation Enter the descriptive data Click Next to go to the Hardware Components page P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 50 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Hardware Component f x Graphical systems are built around a hardware component Select the hardware component which will be the basis of this system Available Hardware Component Select Remove c Back Cancel Figure 7 27 System Wizard Hardware Component This
89. Add button to add the variable to the list Select one or more variables in the list and click Delete to remove them Click Find to open a dialog for finding and replacing variables names Select a single variable in the list and click Rename to change its name If major changes have been made to the logic and it is necessary to delete all internal variables that are no longer needed click the Cleanup button The logic cannot identify whether variables passed into subroutine calls or VPI Library function statements are needed CAAPE versions prior to 008C deleted such variables but newer versions of CAAPE do not Click Close when done Internal variables can also be identified by right clicking on the input variable or result names in a Boolean equation and selecting an internal variable type from their popup menus P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 44 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 12 Cut amp Paste and Drag 8 Drop of Text Data Boolean equations can be inserted by pasting one or more text names separated by newlines and or tabs onto the desired logic view location Equations are inserted using the text names as results This method can be used to create equations for the variables taken from other graphical editing sources such as hardware or message grids Boolean equation input variable and result names are copied to the Clipboard in plain text format as well as in their internal ladder logic format Therefore they can be pasted
90. Can be downloaded to the board or can be split into high low address EPROM files for programming CPU Il system memory devices High low address CPU EPROM files Graphical Simulator data file SMV created if the Generate GraphSim Information run control is selected Read by the Graphical Simulator to simulate the application Report folder files include Compiler report LVC depending on run controls may include listings of the application logic information on hardware module wiring lists of variables and their usages etc Configuration report CFG may include versions of graphical components used to create the text source files dates and times of input and output files etc Updated when EPROM files are created to include high low address file checksums and CRCs ADV data file ADV created if the Generate ADV Information run control is selected Read by the Application Data Verifier to link variable names to variable locations so the ADV can output readable names in its report Consolidation Report file VCR summary of application data created to be compared to a similar file ACR which is created by the ADV P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 25 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 8 3 1 EPROM Files The compile process produces application system files to be used in programming the memory devices on the boards CPU application and system files can be downloaded to the board or split into high low addr
91. Components to the System for more details 7 8 1 2 Make Files and Build Names A graphical system is ultimately used to create the source text files that are compiled to create the application data The conversion from graphics to text is called a Make Files operation The various graphical subsystems must be converted to appropriate text files for each application in the system For example hardware having a CPU II board and two CSEX3 boards is used to create the files for one Vital and two non vital applications The desired names of the source files to be created by a Make Files can be set by using Build Names For example it may be desired to have the base names of the files for three applications to be NorthCPU2 NorthCSX1 and NorthCSX2 respectively Assigning a Build Name of NorthCPU2 to the CPU II board and Build Names of NorthCSX1 and NorthCSX2 to the CSEX3 boards accomplishes this when a Make Files is done the resulting files have the desired names See Section 7 9 Make Files and Build for more details P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 49 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 8 2 Creating a System In the ProjectView of the Project Workspace create the desired system folders and hardware systems System folders are just containers for organizing hardware systems A hardware system represents an actual hardware installation at a customer location Right click on the top level project icon or name and select
92. D DA Rx Ede Ee OR WG bs 6 3 6 2 4 PC AVG KN he GAD KABAN Oe KB st eR obe eS eee 6 3 6 2 5 PERMONE PERMZERO du t RA a er bera dus RERO 6 3 6 2 6 oymbol Fable ese eto ades vm Rab tos buy 6 3 6 3 ex ilc AAP 6 4 6 4 Using Wildcard Characters l c cesse 6 4 SECTION 7 Using CAAPE Graphics eee 7 1 7 1 Graphical Work EloWx 43 22 3E eit eT Ln a eS UR Cete e 7 1 7 2 Creating and Managing Graphical Components 7 3 7 2 1 Component Types 25 2 vex du tenete d a xta Na AG GE RS 7 3 7 2 2 GOnDODSDL Files sr or RSEN ACA AA 7 3 7 2 3 Creating a Component ree 7 4 7 2 4 Setting Component Description 2 aaa 7 6 7 2 5 Removing Components llle 7 6 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 ii Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 7 2 6 Renaming Components sa sieve nad nc eate C KANA Rr 7 6 7 2 7 Editing Components s aoo s Rap eas a ph AA NAG RAD CR emm 7 6 7 3 Editing Hardware Components 0 00000 eee eee eee 7 7 7 3 1 Setting General Hardware Properties 7 7 7 3 2 Adding Hardware Modules 0 00 a 7 8 7 3 3 Setting Module Properties 2 22 ccc eee 7 11 7 3 4 Adding Module Boards vive vero Pia Ve PE Kal 7 12 7 3 5 Editing Board Dmm 7 14 7 3 6 Using the Grid Control va t N ERREUR CIC DECR QR 7 15 7 3 7 Opening the Variable List Dialog 7 15 7 3 8 Using the Find Replace Dialog 0 0 4 0 AA a
93. Dateralss3s51 2425 xe dd t eset aa etat d caet 4 8 SECTION 5 CAAPE Projects e o Pe ERE UR EI Rae DE GE 5 1 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 i Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 5 1 ONE NEN s 2 acia t ce a a actae Peg acea a ep KGG Soa Sea ee oes 5 1 5 1 1 Projects and their Locations llli 5 1 5 1 2 Systems and Applications 0000 cece cena 5 1 5 1 3 Project Data Entry alpha naaa ia pag PUER Yr anna PORES PE 5 2 5 1 4 Project Contents and Files 0 00 Aa 5 2 5 1 5 Viewing Project Data ooa eee eee Rae RO ek BN TG 5 3 5 2 Creating a PEOIGGE eden enims ane ert necs MAN een bus dose ne dE wk 5 6 5 3 Opening an Existing Project vc os pa order RC Ce OSBRERRIDEF TIE 5 9 5 4 Importing ProjJecb maan ka haha ABRA KB ANA REESE URS eects 5 9 5 5 Importing an AFTC5 Track Circuit XML File to a VPI II iVpi Hardware System 2 4 6 ear em oe Ka des NGA AG Eu E OE P 5 10 5 6 Setting Project Opllons 4 c Led maha kaka BANYAGA REOR EE 5 13 5 7 Generating Data for MMS 222 5 14 5 8 Archiving Project Files paa oc NUT ae esses NAG ee ale a PUD RAANG 84 5 15 5 9 Changing Project Directories llli 5 16 SECTION 6 General Rules and Techniques 6 1 6 1 System and Application Names a 6 1 6 2 cies EP 6 1 6 2 1 Symbol Naming Rules 02 kee ee mn 6 1 6 2 2 Symbol Declaration and Usage AA AA 6 2 6 2 3 Subroutine Arguments dae A OSS
94. EA RAI GE RUCE UR e EROR EA SD 7 44 7 5 11 Declaring Internal Variables llli 7 44 7 5 12 Cut amp Paste and Drag amp Drop of Text Data 7 45 7 5 13 Opening the Variable List Dialog llli 7 45 54 Pupn ng Hie EOgiG osos PLA Be sla Gig oe e auo db aou DANG 7 45 7 6 Editing Link Protocol Components e eee eee eee 7 46 7 6 1 PANUNG soit tit BA aot Blain teste Or ee s suu A Etre ud NENA WA 7 46 T T Using the Variable List Dialog n n anaana aeaea 7 47 7 8 Creating and Managing Graphical Systems 7 49 7 8 1 Basic Concepts of Graphical Systems 7 49 7 8 1 1 Component Linking s xax te C RACIO ORC RERO a 7 49 7 8 1 2 Make Files and Build Names 0 7 49 7 8 2 CrealinG a systenm sese dec CE LAKAN ek CAO E Y Kna 7 50 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 iv Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 7 8 3 Adding Components to the System 7 54 7 8 4 Entering Application Revision History 0 0200 7 58 7 8 5 Saving and Closing the System cee eens 7 59 7 8 6 ISOriamiHg GOVSICM nn raras Bad PIC SUPPE PLER TER 7 59 7 8 7 Deleting a SV SUM i user eode BAG dad vorigen 7 59 7 8 8 Opening an Existing System a 7 59 7 8 9 Message Wizard ao etie theres ee D a e ade o UR 7 60 7 9 Make Files and Build aera pec 3D aC Cu HO Re RS RR EXE PIED 7 64 7 9 1 BUNGA NAMES sia LEER REOR RP d
95. EFINED SIMULATOR LOGIC FUNCTIONS which describes functions that can be defined in Simulation Logic files to perform special tasks such as logging variable values and manipulating special message bits PROTOCOL DEFINITION FILE FORMAT which describes simulation logic files which can be installed to simulate the behavior of a serial protocol This is an advanced topic SCRIPT FILE FORMAT which describes the format of script files which can be used to automate simulator operation P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 1 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 APPLICATION DATA FILE FORMAT Application data files contain all of the information needed to simulate an application They can be generated by one of the CAAPE s compilers or created using a text editor however the format is not optimized for easy manual input and it may be simpler to use the CAAPE to create anything other than very simple applications File extension is SMV for Vital applications and SMN for non vital applications 13 2 1 General Format Requirements Maximum line width is 256 characters Blank lines and comments starting with are allowed Tabs and spaces are skipped by the compiler Sections and subsections of data are delimited by square left and right brackets The general format is section name data 13 2 2 File Header These records are required in order to provide type and version information and must be placed at the very start of
96. F OPERATION 3 2 1 Applications CAAPE is an integrated set of tools allowing tan experienced signaling engineer to create simulate and verify VPI iVPI and CenTraCode II s applications An application is the signaling engineer programming that controls the operation of one of the processor boards in a system and customizes it for a given location Vital software controls the safety critical aspects of a system and may use special techniques to ensure that it cannot fail in an unsafe manner Vital applications support such software Vital system software and applications are used on such boards as CPU PD or CPU Il in VPI and VSP in iVPI Non vital software controls aspects of the system that are not considered safety critical Non vital system software and applications are used on such boards as the CSEXn boards in VPI or the NVSP boards in iVPI P2512A Rev J Aug 15 3 1 Alstom Signaling Inc Introduction 3 2 2 System Software and Application Data The software running a VPI or CenTraCode ll s system has two elements system software which provides the basic operating system of the equipment and application data which is the custom programming that configures the system for the interlocking and its operating rules A given version of system software does not change depending on where it is used but application data is created through CAAPE for each individual system Certain non vital system software modules such as those for
97. FTC5 IL4 Standby Device settings ENET 2 10 4 6 1 255 255 255 0 52101 Processing NY Message NVSP2 TWC C6 IN Length 8 Processing Address 00000000000000000000000000000000 Processing NY Message NVSP2 TWC C6 OUT Length 8 Processing Address 0000000000000000000000001 0010110 Warning There is no Special message for this NVSOE port For Help press F1 mi iVPI system XML parse complete with 0 errors 3 warnings xl dap i n D lApps ResearchAndDevApps E2301 A Save the import changes when done The target hardware system is updated with the XML contents P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 11 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects Table 5 2 Importing an AFTC5 XML File to a VPI II IVPI Hardware System Cont Step Procedure The System Properties window shows the list of imported XML files xi OK Description E230 STANDBY SYSTEM Big Cancel Contract Number Contract Name Customer Name MARTA Equipment Location E230 AVONDALE STATION Build Name E230 STANDBY Program Number 00000 000 00 REV A1 AFTC5 XML Import System Date Time vesin User l aftc5 1 12 29 2013 15 32 10 1 14 kfisher aftc5 ILO 01 16 2014 11 21 10 2 18 cbyrn aftc5 IL1 01 17 2014 15 34 30 2 31 tgoody aftc5 IL2 09 09 2013 09 15 10 1 14 tsmith aftc5 IL3 08 19 2013 23 15 30 3 15 tla aftcS IL4 07 19 2013 07 15 10 414 eward aftc5 IL5 01 02 2013 01 15 30 2 20 mpotter aftcB IL6 01 06 2
98. IAL SPCL Non vital Serial Special port address num address bits CSEX name NETNV SERIAL IN Network non vital Serial Control UNLATCHED port address num address bits CSEX name NETNV SERIAL OUT Network non vital Serial port address num address Indication bits CSEX name NETNV SERIAL SPCL Network non vital Serial port address num address Special bits CSEX name NVTWC IN TWC NVTWC Input board channel CSEX name NVTWC OUT TWC NVTWC Output board channel CSEX name P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 14 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference Table 13 2 Message Types Cont Type Name Description Link Info NVTWC SPCL TWC NVTWC Special board channel CSEX name VSC IN VSC Input VSC link block subblock remote VSC name this VSC name VSC OUT VSC Output VSC link block subblock this VSC name remote VSC name 13 2 9 Recommendations for Creating Dummy Applications Use a simplified set of variable types Boolean Integer and Timer are sufficient The simulator does not require the same types as are used in the actual product as long as the Symbol Types and Symbols sections are consistent Create a few appropriate I O boards to provide discrete I O that can be linked to other applications in the project P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 15 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 3 SIMULATION LOGIC FILE FORMAT Simulation logic
99. Move the Simulation Speed slider to the desired speed If the simulator is cycling faster than the desired speed extra idle periods are inserted to slow it down Note that this can only change the maximum speed if the simulator is already cycling slower than the desired speed it cannot be made to run faster If simulation speed is set to its fastest position no idle periods occur and the simulator runs as fast as it possibly can This dialog can also be used to set the session s current date and time Session date and time are used to simulate the operation of application logic functions that access a real time clock Session date and time are initialized to the PC s date and time when the Graphical Simulator program is started but they can be changed by the user at any point Enter the new date and time in the dialog The simulator starts from these values the next time it starts cycling Changing session date and time to earlier values may affect the ability of the History Window to store data correctly P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 12 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 2 Linking Messages and Hardware l O Messages and discrete I O points connecting applications must be linked before running the simulator The linking process tells the simulator that message and I O data must be passed between the applications when the simulator runs 11 8 2 1 Messages Links can be created between output and input messages in dif
100. O CAAPE output file ADV Application Data Verifier AF Audio Frequency ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange a computer data exchange standard code CAA Computer Aided Application CAAPE Computer Aided Application Programming Environment CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization COMM Communication CPIB A combination of VPI and Programmable Genrakode PGK typically used for small interlockings CPU Il Vital processor board in VPI II CPU2 Represents the CPU II board in software CPU PD Central Processing Unit Polynomial Divider a Vital processor board in a VPI system CRG Code Rate Generator board CSEXn Extended Code System Emulator boards in the series of Non Vital processor boards including CSEX CSEX2 CSEX3 and CSEX4 CTC2 v The non vital software platform used in CSEX CSEX2 and CSEX3 boards CTC2 s The non vital software platform used in CenTraCode ll s CPU boards DBO Double Break Output board DI Direct Input board P2512A Rev J Aug 15 2 4 Alstom Signaling Inc General Table 2 1 Common Abbreviations and Glossary Cont Term Definition or Explanation DPRAM Dual Ported Random Access Memory EPROM A programmable read only memory device that is erasable using high intensity ultra violet light FSSVT Field Settable Software Vital Timer GTP Genrakode Track Processor board I O Input Output iVPI Alstom s Int
101. P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 34 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 9 3 3 Assigning Variables to Devices For track plan operation to be simulated simulator variables must be assigned to the various functions of each track plan device In general input variables are assigned to functions that feed data back to the simulator and output variables are assigned to device drive inputs Go to View Parameter List in the main simulator menu The Variable Selector dialog is displayed To assign variables open the Properties dialog for each device and drag variables from the selector dialog into the appropriate editing field in the device s properties dialog Variables can be assigned to devices that only require a single variable input output track without having to open the Properties dialog Drag the variable from the parameter list and drop it directly onto the device s icon on the track plan screen Variable assignments can be modified on a global basis for the entire track plan by using the Text Replace feature Go to Track Plan Replace in the track plan s main menu The Track Plan Text Replace dialog is displayed This dialog can be used to change the assigned application and or parameter names 11 9 3 4 Laying Out Track Sections A track segment is one type of device To create a section of track e Drag a track segment from the toolbar onto the section s starting position on the track plan screen e Use its Pr
102. R MON Y Clear all monitors CLR SKIP varname Y Clear skip by result name CLR SKIP amp nnn Y Clear skip by statement number CLR SKIP Y Clear all skips Cyc NOCHG Y Cycle application until no result variables change Cyc END Y Cycle application to end Cyc nnn MINUTES mmm Y Cycle application for specified time SECONDS Cyc nnn Y Cycle application nnn full cycles Cyc Cycle application one full cycle DEL Y Delete all simulation logic FBrk varname Y Set output filament break FFail varname Y Set output flash fail FPass varname Y Clear output flash fail Flip varname Y Toggle True False variable value GEN filename Y Generate relay file HWINFLASH varname rate Set hardware input FLASHING at specified rate in milliseconds HWINOFF varname Set hardware input OFF HWINON varname Set hardware input ON Load varname Y Simulate output load current present LCLOSE Y Close log file LOG OFF Y Disable logging LOG ON Y Enable logging LOPEN filename Y Open log file Mon varname Y Add monitor by result name P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 56 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference Table 13 4 Application Level Commands Cont Command Capture Meaning Mon amp nnn Y Add monitor by statement number MSGINF varname Set input message bit False MSGINT varname Set input message bit True NFBrk varname Y Clear output filament break NLoad varname Y Simulate output load c
103. S The CAAPE project file stores full file path information on all of the files in the project A project directory can be renamed or the entire project directory copied to a different location When re opened the project CAAPE adjusts the file path information so that its files are found in their new locations This only works for files that are contained within the project directory In a few cases it is possible to make the project refer to files that are outside its directory these files must not be moved or renamed or else CAAPE cannot find them The fact that full path information is saved in a CAAPE project may affect importing project files A project cannot be moved to another location and immediately imported into another project The source project must be opened first so that its file paths are adjusted for their new location then when the project is closed it can be imported into a new project P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 16 Alstom Signaling Inc General Rules and Techniques SECTION 6 GENERAL RULES AND TECHNIQUES 6 1 SYSTEM AND APPLICATION NAMES System and application names should be unique 6 2 SYMBOLS Symbols also called variables are used to name the input output and internal values processed by an application A symbol is a name that represents the value and is meaningful to the user Symbols are used to identify e The physical input and output ports on I O boards The values that control the operation of a b
104. TIONS These special functions can be accessed from simulation logic with subroutine CALLs 13 4 1 User Message Logging Functions These allow the user to log text and variable data to the Message Window and the log file They can be used to log information on the status of the application the fact that simulation reaches a given point in the logic etc Function LOG TEXT text Logs the specified text whenever this function is encountered in the logic e extis the user specified text enclosed in quotes For example log a message if variable VAR1 is True IF VAR1 TRUE CALL LOG TEXT VARI is true Function LOG VAL variable text Logs the value of the specified variable plus optional text whenever this function is encountered in the logic e variable is a reference to some variable in the logic extis the user specified text enclosed in quotes For example log the value of variable ARRAY 10 CALL LOG VAL ARRAY 10 log the value of integer variable COUNT1 plus a message CALL LOG VAL COUNT 1 Loop count for checking messages P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 19 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 4 2 Non Vital Serial Special Message Functions These give the user access to non vital serial messages in non vital applications They can be used to help simulate the operation of special messages in some protocols A non vital serial message is identified by its serial port number and eithe
105. Table 12 9 Miscellaneous and Temporary Files File Description 96996 Temporary run controls file Created by Vital compiler WRK Temporary logic work file Created by Vital compiler ADVSYMTB YES Temporary files created by ADV ADVSYMTB NO ADVVSTB TMP LOGICREP TMP Temporary logic expressions data Created by non vital compiler LINK PRM Temporary application data file Created by non vital compiler used by non vital linker ANC Temporary files used to pass build status and configuration data CP from CAA programs back to CAAPE YoPG P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 10 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure Table 12 10 Label Files File Description LSH I O label data for HP format Created by Vital compiler used by HP label generator HP format label plot Created by HP label generator HPS System Module HP1 Extender Module 1 HP2 Extender Module 2 HP3 Extender Module 3 HP4 Extender Module 4 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 11 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure 12 6 3 CenTraCode Il s CAA Files See the CenTraCode II s CAA Reference Manual for more details on these files Table 12 11 Compiler Input Files File Description CSI Main input file Contains INCLUDE statements for other input data files listed below Used by non vital compiler and simulator HDW Hardware definition file Named in VPC and CSI files CSS Serial
106. Using the Graphical Simulator 11 9 3 2 Editing Device Properties Device properties include display options and assigned variables Once a device is placed on the track plan open the device by double clicking on it or by going to Properties on its popup menu The General tab is used to view or set the variables assigned to the device functions CFE Color Light Device Properties General Caption Properties Display Image Label Simulator Parameter Initial State i Clear CTCF i Cancel C T amp F o Signal 5H05137 514NCREN LDO Filament 514NCREN LDO Flash Figure 11 17 Device Properties General P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 33 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator The Caption Properties tab is used to set descriptive text to be displayed with the device CFE Color Light Device Properties General Caption Properties Display Image Caption To insert a line break use ctr lt enter gt Alignment Left Justify Figure 11 18 Device Properties Caption Properties The Display Image tab is used to select colors and other display attributes GFE Color Light Device Properties True Image Cw cl Signal Base Left m True Image False Image Broken Image Invalid Image Alternate Image l6 X le Figure 11 19 Device Properties Display Image An option is available to automatically display the Properties dialog when a new device is placed on the screen
107. Uxx for EPROM programming NVSP Comm Files system software name HEX system software name U8 system software name U9 Created by HEX copied from installed files and split into Uxx by compiler Usage HEX for download Uxx for EPROM programming 8 11 1 5 VPI CPU PD CPU PD Application Files application name U18 application name U19 Created by Split Usage EPROM programming CPU PD System Files system software name U16 system software name U17 Created by Split Usage EPROM programming P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 39 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 11 1 6 VPI CPU CPU Application Files application name U16 application name U4 application name U17 application name U5 application name U20 application name U8 Created by Split Usage EPROM programming CPU System Files system software name U14 system software name U2 system software name U15 system software name U3 Created by Split Usage EPROM programming 8 11 1 7 VPI VSC Vital Serial Application Files application name VB1 application name VB2 Created by VPI Compile Usage EPROM programming Vital Serial System Files vsc software name HEX Created by copied from installed VPI CAA directory Usage EPROM programming P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 40 for each VSC board 1 to N Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 11 1 8 VPI CSEX1 CSEX2 CSEX3 CSEX1 Application Files application name U36 applicat
108. a 7 16 7 3 9 Upgrading BoardS a GS Y Re URL dia LG 7 17 7 3 10 Setting Board Relationships 2 a 7 17 LOS PANUNG Dha e ana Kan ha or etis n a red ea ag NG s 7 19 7 3 12 iVPI VSP Board and Zone Controller liliis 7 19 7 3 13 Ordering of Vital Messages llli 7 22 7 4 Editing Message Components eee eee eee 7 23 7 4 1 Source and Destination Names 00 7 23 7 4 2 Using the Grid Control i uu BAGA RR ANG d aaa RR 7 24 7 4 3 Pining aS sou Re e CRURA PA 7 24 7 5 Editing Logic Components c iaceo m ro ui exes ga ee JAAN DOES OUS EE 7 25 7 5 1 Overview of Statement Types liec 7 27 7 5 1 1 Boolean Equations i d EXERCERE ARA EERIE 7 27 7 5 1 2 COMMMCTIS Lire occ er ra phen CUI a ate Seca td NKO 7 29 7 5 1 3 GIOUD Record S 5a 3 a eel Sada ule MING EE DPI 7 29 7 5 1 4 Function Statements lille 7 29 7 5 2 Cale POSITORITO sioe o d UN RR GU EOS TE ERROR d alae ete 7 29 7 5 3 General Editing Techniques 0 0 aaua anaana 7 30 7 5 3 1 Using Hotkeys and the Hotkey Bar 7 30 7 5 3 2 Using the Logic Toolbar AA 7 30 7 5 3 3 Navigating the Logic View Window 7 31 7 5 3 4 Selecting Logic Items 0 4 A A A AA eee 7 31 7 5 3 5 USING FOPUPS ov TE CR EU SEE ETO READS 7 32 7 5 3 6 Opening Logic Items 0c ccs 7 32 7 5 3 7 Using UNAJO reie oe ecd o och E waa ee 7 32 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 iii Al
109. a entry is not wanted for some reason The text based process involves 1 Creating or importing applications and their files 2 Editing application file contents 3 Setting application run controls 4 Compiling to create the PROM and other output report files 5 Optionally performing simulation to check whether the application logic is correct 6 Performing Application Data Verification to verify that the Vital application data generated by the compiler accurately reflects user input 7 Programming the memory devices on the boards to install the application and system software See SECTION 9 Application Change Process for certain aspects of changing an existing application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 3 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 4 CREATING APPLICATIONS When working in graphics CAAPE produces applications as part of the Make Files Build operations When working directly with text files applications must be created manually In the ProjectView of the Project Workspace create system folders to organize the applications Right click the top level project and select Add System to Project from its popup menu The system folders created also appear on the FileView If there is no need for multiple systems a single system can be created directly from the FileView Select a system in the FileView and add or import applications into it An application is a related set of input files along with the outpu
110. a for selected port esce x Serial Contos Controls Port Available Components Linked Components Queens C55 R1 Queens C55 R2 Queens C55 R3 Remove Queens1_CSS 51 Queens 055 53 New d ree DA TN Figure 7 29 System Wizard Component Links In this page components are assigned or linked to hardware boards to add logic message and protocol configuration to the system Select a board from the list The types of components that can be linked to the board are listed in the Type drop down Select a component type and a port number if necessary All linkable components are listed in the Available Components list Select one of these components and click the Add button to link the selected component to the board The chosen component is added to the Linked Components list on the right Create a new component from this screen by clicking the New button Components do not have to be fully defined before they can be linked to a board the component can be linked first and edited at a later time See Adding Components to the System for more information on linking components to boards When all system data is entered click the Finish button to close the System Wizard and finish creating the system The hardware component used by the system is now opened for editing However there is a difference when a hardware component is opened from the ProjectView rather than the ComponentView the hardware is no
111. a is organized into systems A CAAPE system represents a set of hardware configured for use at a particular customer location Configuring the system involves specifying the hardware layout and how it is applied at the customer location The user entered configuration data is converted into data structures that are loaded into the program memory of the Vital and non vital processor boards in the hardware to control their operation The user programming for a given processor board in a hardware system is called an application In CAAPE s FileView hierarchy each system contains one or more applications CAAPE shows the systems and their application files in a hierarchical tree arrangement where the project is the top level item that contains the systems and each system contains application data This arrangement is described in more detail when the contents of the Project Workspace are discussed P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 1 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects 5 1 3 Project Data Entry CAAPE provides two approaches to developing applications The first approach involves creating and linking graphical components Graphical components are reusable graphical elements that represent major types of items in a system Each component is stored in two files a data file whose contents depend on the component type and a symbol file that contains any variable names that may be used in the component The user does not normally have to be concerned with th
112. ack plan device elements To open a track plan in Run mode select the track plan in the Project Contents Window and go to Open Run in its popup menu The Track Plan View is opened in Run mode for performing simulation To open all track plans in Run mode go to Open All Run in the Track Plans folder s popup menu 11 11 5 1 Device Display Images The image that a given device element displays on the track plan screen depends on its user selected properties and on its current run time state The state of the device depends on the values of its associated variables and on any run time device modes selected by the user When a track plan is first opened in Run mode some devices may display an Invalid image a red track segment a color light or SA signal device that is crossed out in red or a signal device that shows red cross hatching Devices are considered invalid if they have no assigned variables or if they have assigned variables that cannot be found by the simulator Reasons for an invalid device may include e No variable assigned at all e Misspelled application or variable name or a variable that once existed but was removed from the application e Array index index specified for a non array variable no index or bad index specified for an array variable P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 50 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 11 5 2 Setting Track Occupancy Track occupancy can be set just by clicking on t
113. addition to the signal word whereas Notice and Safety Instructions Signal Word Panels include only the signal word This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert of potential physical injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death Signal Word Panel Definition Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided A DANGER will result in death or serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury Indicates a situation which could result in property NOTICE damage or information considered important but not hazard related SAFETY Indicates specific safety related instructions or INSTRUCTIONS procedures P2512A Rev J Aug 15 Alstom Signaling Inc P2512A Rev J Aug 15 Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page SECTION 1 Safety Precautions eee 1 1 1 1 Safety Precaution Matrix 2 2 ee lll le n 1 1 1 2 Safety Precautions 2 2 25 eos Eu NG ee Ha LA dba bre Ee d tret um Bote 1 2 SECTION 2 General 5i zx 5 ud Rare bna ese Decr OR RUM Son Mania era caca 2 1 2 1 About This Manual s ass ss 5 n ant anas Ang os ad ale Gi Ce ee ERE End es 2 1 2 2 Salety RN ure PR m E AP IR 2 2 2 3 Intended AudIen6e cox spat tete x o Seta base bets ara o S EXTR pe oy 2 3
114. age Depending on the size of the logic statements versus the size of the printer paper and the size of the selected page margins it is possible that some statements are too large to print on a single sheet of paper A warning is displayed if this is about to happen prompting these options e Abort the print zoom out the logic to make it smaller and try again e Allow printing to continue Statements that are too large to fit on a single page are split P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 55 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 13 USING THE WATCH WINDOW The Watch Window can be used to view the current values of selected application variables It displays these columns Application The name of the application to which the variable belongs Variable The variable name Value The current value of the variable If a variable belongs to a subroutine which is not currently active the displayed value is Use the Variables dialog to configure the contents of the Watch Window The Watch Window is a dockable tool bar It can be docked at the top bottom or either side of the Graphical Simulator s main window or can be made to float anywhere on the screen Use the Watch Window s popup menu to control its placement To select variables in the Watch Window click over the leftmost text field application name Variables can be selected using single click Ctrl click and Shift click Double left click
115. age Wizard button As components are added to a system they appear in the ProjectView under the boards that use them A component listed in the ProjectView can be opened from there by double clicking on it P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 57 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 8 4 Entering Application Revision History In CAAPE versions 005M and later a Revision History tab has been added to the board editing screens for CPU PD CPU Il VSP CSEX NVSP and CenTraCode Il s boards This page can be used to enter revision history for each Vital or non vital application in the system As revision history is a property of the applications in a system rather than of the basic hardware component this page is active only in system editing Newer compilers can place this information in their configuration reports and the Relay Equivalent Drawing Package REDP can also use it to output revision data Figure 7 32 shows the Revision History page for a CSEX3 board E CSEX3 1 5 Queens1A loj x Application Revision History Board Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Diagnostics Data Log Rev History List 0 1 5 10 05 Initial 5 20 05 50 Complete 6 1 05 Release 7 1 05 Modified after customer review on 5 28 m Revision Data ID fi 2 Date fi 0 15 05 Author as Remove Summary Fixed per SPR 321 u Details Down Set Data l Figure 7 32 Revision History Page Click the New button to cre
116. al software Lists of AND ed variables are OR ed together in relay terms each Boolean equation consists only of a set of simple parallel branches In the example below is an AND operation and is an OR operation Example in original format BOOL X A B C D Example in equivalent sum of products format BOOL X A C AD B C B D P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 36 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 11 PROGRAMMING MEMORY DEVICES 8 11 1 EPROM Files These files contain the data to be programmed into the memory devices on the various boards in the system They are listed in CAAPE s FileView File extensions depend on board type 8 11 1 1 iVPI VSP iVPI VSP Main Application Files application name HEX application name U40 application name U41 Created by HEX created by compiler Uxx created by Split Usage HEX for download Uxx for EPROM programming iVPI VSP Main System Files system software name HEX system software name U42 system software name U43 Created by HEX copied from installed iVPI CAA Uxx created by Split Usage HEX for download Uxx for EPROM programming iVPI VSP Comm Application Files application name HEX application name U8 application name U9 Application name is main application name plus CP Created by HEX and UXX created by compiler Usage HEX for download Uxx for EPROM programming P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 37 Alstom Signaling Inc Using A
117. allowing the use of advanced statement types such as IF or WHILE in Vital simulation logic with no restriction on using inputs as equation results However subroutines cannot be defined in simulation logic and calls to subroutines in the main application logic cannot be made from it A number of special statements are available in simulation logic which are not available in normal logic See Section 13 4 Predefined Simulator Logic Functions for more details P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 17 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference For example This section declares variables not already existing in the application SYMBOLS BOOLEAN SIM1 SIM2 5 INTEGER LOOP COUNT Start of the simulation logic No header required This equation simulates the response time of a device SW1 OUT is an application output SW1 IN is an application input TIME DELAY 10 SECONDS BOOL SW1 IN SW1 OUT This equation counts the number of cycles a variable is True If a maximum count is reached the variable is cleared and a user message is logged VARI is a Boolean variable in the application LOOP COUNT is an Integer variable declared in this file IF VAR1 TRUE LOOP COUNT LOOP COUNT 1 IF LOOP COUNT 10 BOOL VAR1 FALSE LOG TEXT VAR1 was True for too long ELSE LOOP COUNT 0 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 18 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 4 PREDEFINED SIMULATOR LOGIC FUNC
118. ame CAAPE project the simulator can be started from within CAAPE Compile all the applications to be simulated making sure their run controls include the Generate GraphSim Information option Go to the FileView and select the project system or application folder Go to Actions Simulate in the main menu or click the Simulate toolbar button A simulator project file is created if it does not already exist Any applications in the selected item are added to the project For example if a system folder was selected all the applications in that system are added The Graphical Simulator program is started and the project file is opened When the simulator opens a project it reads each simulator data file to determine its variables messages hardware and logic If an application is changed and recompiled in CAAPE its data file is updated by the compiler The simulator project must be closed and reopened for the changes to take effect The Graphical Simulator program can be started from CAAPE without immediately loading a project by going to Actions Utilities Graphical Simulator in the main menu or start the simulator directly by going to Programs Caape Graphical Simulator in the Windows Menu bar 11 5 DEFAULT EDITOR Like the CAAPE the simulator has a setting to choose a default text editor that is used when creating or editing text files such as scripts Go to Options Editor in the main menu P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 4 Alstom Signal
119. any designs or for the safe performance of the train control system P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 6 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions UNIQUE SITE ID CONTROL MUST BE MAINTAINED Failure to properly assign maintain and control unique Site IDs for VPI systems can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment Alstom strongly recommends that strict control of the Site IDs be maintained so that the expected configuration of all VPIs in the train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control systems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any designs or for the safe performance of the trai
120. applications in the project The simulator provides templates for manually creating dummy applications See Section 11 7 7 Creating an Application Data File Manually P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 37 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 10 1 2 Simulation Logic Files Simulation Logic VSQ Files are simplified application files that add additional statements to a particular application s logic They are easier to enter than dummy applications but have a number of limitations e Simulation logic statements cannot be viewed in the application s ladder logic view e Breakpoints cannot be set in simulation logic e Variables declared in the simulation logic file cannot be viewed or changed and cannot be linked to track plan devices To add simulation logic go to Add Simulator Logic in the application s popup menu Enter the file path of the simulation logic file The simulator reads the simulation logic file and adds its logic statements to those of the application All simulation logic files are executed once each time simulation reaches the last statement in the application logic See Section 13 3 Simulation Logic File Format for details on creating a simulation logic file 11 10 2 Removing Simulation Logic To remove simulation logic for an application go to Remove Simulator Logic in the application s popup menu The simulation logic is removed from the application and no longer executes when the simulator is cycl
121. ard Network VSoE DigiSafe Board Name similia m Advanced Features Comm Program REV v Subnets Routing Comm Software 33036 046 01 REV D E v Redundancy r enet1 Comm Device MACTCP Diagnostics Enable Jv Properties Properties IP Address 12080551 Device None Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Port Subnet 120 80 55 0 Links m enet2 Comm Device DigiS afe Enable Iv Properties WPI ID EC IP Address 208052 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 8 Subnet 20805650 Figure 7 10 VSP Board Network Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 20 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics In the DigiSafe tab create a new DigiSAFE Zone Controller message by selecting New Enter the DigiSAFE corresponding Zone Controller ID ZC ID which is a 16 bit unsigned integer The type must always be set to DS PEER and always be redundant DIGISAFE COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRE UNIQUE ZONE CONTROLLER ID A unique ID must be assigned to each zone controller in order to give each zone controller a unique identification in the network of DigiSAFE communications Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment DIGISAFE COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRE UNIQUE NETWORK IDS The DigiSAFE iVPI IDs and the zone controller IDs must be assigned such that the values are
122. ardware port from its associated input parameter This allows the user to set the input parameter variable directly and not have the simulator change the parameter value when it processes inputs OFF Input is False ON Input is True FLASH Input is Flashing at specified rate FLASHB Input is inverse flashing at specified rate FLASH2 Same as FLASH FLASH2B Same as FLASHB PULSE Input pulses once for specified period PULSE2 Same as PULSE P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 46 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 11 4 2 Outputs To view and edit the output ports on a hardware board or to set output failure modes such as filament break select an output board in the hardware and go to Edit Outputs in its popup menu The Outputs Edit dialog is displayed for that board This dialog is used to view and edit the output ports of an output board OUTPUTS Module 1 Slot 13 DBO BN im xl None NE Close None None None None i DB030008 07 None i8 DBO30008 08 None Figure 11 23 Outputs Edit Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 47 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator The grid shows the parameter name current failure mode and output state of all output ports on the board Output state is determined by the simulator and cannot be changed Available output states are OFF Output is False ON Output is Tr
123. ariable Example FALSE 1HD DI PAUSE Causes the program to update the user interface and stop script execution until it is restarted by the user Ignored if the script is not being run interactively Format PAUSE P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 43 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference PROG Displays the status of the selected logic statements in the current application Same options as the BOOL command Examples PROG PROG amp 1F4 PROJECT Commands following this record are assumed to apply to all the applications in the project In effect until an APP record is encountered Format PROJECT PROJLOG Turns simulation logging on or off for all applications that have open logging files Formats PROJLOG ON turn logging on for all applications with open logging files PROJLOG FF turn logging off for all applications with open logging files Examples PROJLOG ON PROJLOG OFF PROJRESET Applies the specified RESET command to all applications See RESET for available reset commands Examples PROJRESET AOCD PROJRESET VALUE P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 44 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference PROJTRACE Applies the specified TRACE command to all applications See TRACE for available TRACE options Examples PROJTRACE OFF PROJTRACE ALL PROJTRACE CHG PTR Changes the current equation pointer in the logic of the current application When the logic is run it starts at the specified statement Format
124. ariable type and entering text in the Match control searches for the first variable whose name starts with that text Select one or more variables and use the True and False buttons to set their current values The values of input variables are usually overridden when an incoming message or I O point is updated during simulator cycling To set the time delay of a timer equation select the equation s result variable and click the Time Delay button A new time delay value can then be entered Equation time delays can also be set through the application s Ladder Logic View Select one or more variables and click Add to Watch to add them to the Watch Window Watch Window variables are listed at the bottom of the dialog The dialog can also be used to remove watch variables or change their positions in the Watch Window See Section 11 13 Using the Watch Window for details on Watch Window operation P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 22 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 5 Setting Up Variable History Data can be collected on how the values of selected variables have changed over time This data is displayed in the History Window To select variables for history data collection go to Setup Current History File in the main menu The Setup History dialog is displayed Setup History x 10 5RC m History List Variables Visible Remove 1 3RC YDE MSF YARDCS Y 1 4RC YDE MSF YARDCS Y Remove All Show Hide Up
125. aste toolbar button P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 10 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 3 Setting Module Properties Right click on a blank section of the module and select Open from its popup menu A module properties editing screen is displayed E Module 1 NewHdw Module Properties Addresses Signatures Hamess m Part Number Module PN 31506 015 01 plug couplers split m Manual Addressing 1 0 Label 00000 000 00 v Board Addresses Wiring Hamess lv Signatures Slot 5 6 Split EAD Rack Position Module Prefix Figure 7 6 Module Properties Screen Enter the module data which may include e General properties wiring type module type and part number etc e Manual addressing for module boards e Wiring harnesses When done click on the X close button in the upper right of the Module Properties screen P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 11 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 4 Adding Module Boards Right click on the numbered rectangle of an empty slot and select Insert Board from its popup menu or select the empty slot and go to Hardware Insert Board in the main menu The Board Type Part Number dialog is displayed Board Type Part Number x Part Number a 166 029 32 31166 029 27 31156 023 28 31156 023 23 CSE 31166 029 30 CSEX3 mess DBO E 31166 029 32 ni Description CPU PD w 40025 366 SW Figure 7 7 B
126. ata from another project go to File Import Project in the main menu Select a source project file The Project Import dialog is displayed x mp Queens wg IMPORT ITEMS 3 Applications 3 Applications E Queens1 VTI E Queens14TI E Queens1 NV E9 Track Plans E9 Track Plans E Queens 1 E Queens 1 EI Scripts x Scripts E Queens1 gt gt Source File E MA stomProgramsNCaape N amp ppsNQueens Queens spi Description E DK Cancel Figure 11 2 Project Import Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 9 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator The tree control on the left lists the available items in the source project the one on the right lists the items that are to be imported Select a source item on the left and click the gt gt key to import it Click OK when done The selected data is imported into the current project Imported script and track plan files are copied into the current project directory imported applications refer to the application definition files in their original directories since these files have been created by an external compiler program If the names of any imported items already exist they are given unique temporary names and can be renamed later The simulator variables associated with the devices on a track plan are identified by their application name If a track plan is imported into a project the appli
127. ate a new revision Enter a revision identifier such as A or 1 0 fill in the other descriptive data and click the Set Data button to save it See SECTION 10 Configuration Control for more information P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 58 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 8 5 Saving and Closing the System When system editing is performed system data is saved when the hardware component s Save is done go to the main hardware view and use File Save or the Save toolbar button The system is closed when the all hardware component editing screens have been closed If there are unsaved changes a prompt to save them first is displayed 7 8 6 Renaming a System Right click on the system in the ProjectView of the Project Workspace and select Rename System from the popup menu Enter the new system name 7 8 7 Deleting a System Right click on the system in the ProjectView of the Project Workspace and select Remove System from the popup menu The system is deleted However none of the components used in the system are deleted since these could be reused in other systems Components must be deleted individually 7 8 8 Opening an Existing System Right click on the system in the ProjectView of the Project Workspace and select Edit from the popup menu or double click on the system icon System documentation is displayed for editing Make any necessary changes and click OK The hardware component is opened for system editing
128. ation and Usage Declaring a symbol reserves a memory location for it within the application This happens when The symbol is used as a hardware input or a bit in an incoming message The symbol is named as an internal variable in application logic e The symbol is automatically made the result of a CAA generated equation In most cases the same symbol name cannot be declared twice in the same application i e in the I O messages or logic for a single processor board However the name might be used many times as output or equation variables in the same application For example if VRDFRNT DI is a direct input in a VPI application it cannot be used as another hardware input as a Vital serial or CSEX to VPI message bit or as a Current Result or Self Latched logic variable However it can be used as many times as needed as bits in outgoing Vital serial messages or as a parameter variable not a result in Vital logic equations The same symbol name can be declared in different applications in the same system From the above example VRDFRNT DI could be sent to a CSEX board in a VPI to CSEX message and on the CSEX side declared as a VPI to CSEX message bit Since the VPI and CSEX applications run on separate boards the same name can be used in each P2512A Rev J Aug 15 6 2 Alstom Signaling Inc General Rules and Techniques 6 2 3 Subroutine Arguments In non vital applications the same symbol name can be used in the argument
129. ation folder and selecting Add File to Application from its popup menu An Add File dialog is displayed Enter the name and type of the new file If CAAPE has a template for the selected file type a new file is created in the project directory and its contents are copied from the template An entry for the new file is created in the application folder Serial protocol configuration files LPC Files are not text based and must be created graphically See SECTION 8 4 7 Combining Text and Components for details 8 4 6 Importing Files into Applications Import existing files by right clicking on the application folder or its Output or Report subfolder and selecting Import Files from the popup menu An Import File dialog is displayed Select the files to be imported The imported files are copied into the project directory and entries are made in the appropriate folder for them 8 4 7 Combining Text and Components It is possible to use graphical components to represent the hardware protocol configuration and logic portions of an application and use text files for the rest First add or import the application into the project In the ComponentView of the Project Workspace create or import a component Edit the component using its graphical screens When editing is done right click on the component and choose Make File from its popup menu Select the target application Application files are generated from the graphical data and placed
130. ator variable Track Device Click to occupy unoccupy track and toggle value of associated simulator variable Color Light Device with selectable color and base SA Signal Device with selectable colors and base ar x PI OT Switch Device P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 31 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator Click on the toolbar s header and use Tool Tips to identify the device type for each button To add devices to the track plan simply drag them from the toolbar onto the track plan When a device is placed on the track plan right clicking on it produces a popup menu of available operations Multiple devices can be selected for some operations by using the mouse to drag a box around them or by clicking on them with the Ctrl key held down Cut copy and paste can be used to copy existing devices If multiple devices are cut or copied and then pasted at the same time the pasted devices are placed on the screen relative to the position of the device whose popup menu was used to do the cut or copy For example if two devices are selected and the rightmost device is right clicked to do the Copy when a paste is done the rightmost device is placed at the paste position and the other device is placed to its left Devices can be moved by dragging them to their new location To move multiple selected devices hold down the Ctrl key while dragging P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 32 Alstom Signaling Inc
131. ay in effect until they are changed by going through the User Preferences process When the user is asked to create a new project CAAPE displays the Default Project Path as the starting base directory location where the project is placed This location does not have to be used To locate projects at a different directory location manually enter its path or click the browse button to the right The Default Editor is the external text editor program that is used to edit the text files that are created and used by CAAPE For example when a compile is performed various report files are generated and displayed in CAAPE s user interface Double click on the name of a report file in CAAPE and the file is opened in the default editor Manually enter the file path of the text editor or click the browse button to the right The Default Logic Zoom option can be used to automatically zoom graphical logic display windows when they are first opened CAAPE can be asked to copy project files of selected types to another directory for archiving purposes The Copy Project options specify which types of files should be copied The colors of certain items in CAAPE s graphical editing screens can be specified using the Colors options The display of certain warnings can be disabled elsewhere in the program if they become annoying Show All Warnings can be used to re enable them later again P2512A Rev J Aug 15 4 7 Alstom Signaling Inc
132. ble in the Watch Window or in the Variable Selector dialog and use one of the Find Usages options to display the editing window for the selected usage of the variable P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 54 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 12 3 Using Bookmarks Bookmarks can be used to return quickly to positions of interest in the logic To set a bookmark at a statement right click on the statement and select Bookmark from its popup menu The Bookmark Properties dialog is displayed for adding a short descriptive name The statement position and its associated name are added to the list of bookmarks Selecting a bookmark at a later time scrolls the logic view to the statement To go to a bookmarked statement or to edit the list of bookmarks go to Logic Bookmarks in the main menu The Bookmark List dialog is displayed for going to bookmarks removing bookmarks from the list or changing the bookmark s descriptive name 11 12 4 Popup Menus Right clicking over selected items causes a popup menu to be displayed for those items Available popup menus are listed in the online help 11 12 5 Printing Ladder Logic Go to File Print in the main menu A preview of the printed logic can be displayed by going to File Print Preview in the main menu Page format can be set by going to File Page Setup in the main menu The Page Setup dialog is displayed Zooming the logic in or out increases or decreases its size on the printed p
133. branch are combined with an AND operation Elements combined with an OR operation are represented by two or more parallel branches connected by vertical lines Parallel combinations of data can in turn be made part of an AND operation by placing them on a branch with other data Any combination of AND and OR operations can thus be represented by the appropriate combination of branches Parameters can be complemented Complementing is similar to using the back contact of a relay and applies a logical NOT operation to the variable a False input value produces a True output value and vice versa Equation parameters are displayed using various types of symbols depending on e Whether they are complemented e Whether they are normally open or normally closed These terms refer to the quiescent state of the relays the variables represent the quiescent state affects how a variable is represented but has no effect on how the equation is executed in the logic e What symbol set e g ladder logic straight line or drop line is selected For time delay equations equations whose response to changes in input may be delayed by a specified time the time delay values are considered part of the properties of the equation Some equation properties such as equation type and time delay are displayed in an equation s statement header P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 27 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics In Figure 7 15 an equation is shown us
134. c Using the Graphical Simulator 11 11 3 Simulating Messages To view and edit the contents of a message find the message in the Project Contents window and select Open from the popup menu The Message Edit dialog is displayed Port 1 01111111 NY SERIAL IN al El x L meme wwe Close Latch Figure 11 21 Message Edit Dialog This dialog is used to view and edit the contents of a message sent or received by an application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 43 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 11 3 1 Setting Message Parameters The grid shows the message bit parameters and their values To simulate reception of an input message change the parameter values as desired and click Update The new parameter values become active when the application reaches the point in its logic where it processes input data Input message parameter values can be changed one at a time by choosing True or False from each parameter s drop down list in the Value column Multiple parameter values can be changed by selecting the desired cells in the Value column then right clicking and choosing True or False from the popup menu Multiple cells can be selected by using Shift click or Ctrl click or by clicking on the column header to select the entire column Parameter values cannot be changed for output messages only viewed 11 11 3 2 Latching The Latch check box is displayed for input m
135. c Using the Graphical Simulator 11 15 USING SCRIPTS Scripts are files containing user defined commands for the simulator to execute They are typically used to set up the simulation to some desired condition 11 15 1 Adding Scripts To create a new script and add it to the project Go to File New Script in the main menu Goto New Script in the popup menu of the Scripts folder The Script File dialog is displayed Enter the script name and optional description and click OK An entry is added to the project but the script file is not created until a request is made to edit it Script files are always stored in the project directory The root name of the script file is the script name a standard VSC extension is added when the file is created If a script of the same name already exists in the project the program assigns a unique temporary name A script can be renamed by selecting it in the Project Contents Window and then clicking on it a second time All scripts in a project must have a unique name 11 15 2 Editing Scripts Scripts are edited using an external text editor A script can be opened for editing from within the simulator Before editing identify the text editor to be used by going to Options Editor in the main menu and selecting the text editor program To open a script double click on its name in the Project Contents Window or right click on it and select Edit File from its popup menu See Section
136. can be appended to the normal logic of an application in order to simulate error conditions or the behavior of field devices Simulation logic files contain logic statements and optional variable declarations 13 3 1 Symbol Section This optional section contains declarations of any variables that do not already exist in the application and are used only in the simulation logic Variables declared in this section must not have the same name as variables already existing in the application Allowed variable types are e BOOLEAN True False values Arrays are allowed e INTEGER 16 bit numeric values Arrays are allowed e TIMER used as results of timer equations Cannot be used in arrays This section must be placed first in the file The section format is SYMBOLS BOOLEAN Boolean variable list INTEGER Integer variable list TIMER Timer variable list Each subsection is optional as is the entire section Variables in each list can be placed on multiple lines and separated by spaces or commas Indentation is optional and is used in the format shown for clarity All variables start in a zero or False state P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 16 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 3 2 Logic Section The statements in a simulation logic file use the same format as those in the input file The simulator program is more flexible in processing simulation logic than the actual CAA compiler by
137. cation Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment SOFTWARE REVISION CONTROL MUST BE MAINTAINED Failure to properly version control VPI system software and application data can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment Alstom strongly recommends that strict revision control of the VPI application data and system software be maintained so that the expected configuration in the train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control systems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for
138. cation See PROJTRACE for setting trace for all applications at once Also see MON for setting monitors to trace specific statements Formats TRACE OFF clears all tracing TRACE ALL display trace information for all statements as they are executed TRACE CHG display trace information for statements whose results change as they are executed TRUE Sets a variable in the current application True Use NTRUE not FALSE to set a variable False Format TRUE var name where var name is the name of a variable Example TRUE 1HD DI P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 51 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference UPDATE Causes the program to update the user interface and continue executing the script Ignored if the script is not being run interactively Format UPDATE VAL Displays the current values of one or more variables in the current application Formats VAL display all variables VAL name text display one or more variables by name where name text specifies that the values of all variables starting with this text is dis played Example VAL 2EA all variables starting with 2EA are displayed P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 52 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 6 5 Command Summary Project Level The following commands are processed at the project level Minimum command text is shown in upper case Commands that can be automatically captured from the user interface into a script file are indicat
139. cation whether or not indication data has actually changed They can be used in protocols where data transmission is controlled by the application for example through a special message bit Function XMIT NVSER ADDR port address check address bits Transmit the data in the indication specified by its serial port and address e port is the serial port from 1 to max e address is a string giving the message address e check address bits is TRUE if the number of address bits is significant For example Transmit the indication with address 00110 on port 3 CALL XMIT NVSER ADDR 3 00110 TRUE Function XMIT NVSER POSN port position Transmit the data in the indication specified by its serial port and position e port is the serial port from 1 to max position is the zero based position of the message For example Transmit the second indication on port 3 CALL XMIT NVSER POSN 3 1 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 22 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 4 4 TWC NVTWC Special Message Functions These give the user access to TWC NVTWC serial messages in non vital applications They can be used to help simulate the operation of special messages in some protocols TWC NVTWC messages are identified by their board channel and position in the list of messages of a given type which have been assigned to the channel Function GET NVTWCSPY board channel pos message bit return value Returns the value of the
140. cation names in the track plan may now be incorrect See Section 11 9 Track Plan Setup for an explanation on editing track plans to find how to view and change the variables names associated with a track plan Also note that track plans must always be created and viewed using the same Windows Font Size setting If a track plan is created on a PC using Large Fonts its device and text spacing may appear distorted if it is viewed on a PC using Small Fonts 11 7 7 Creating an Application Data File Manually Application data files are normally generated by the CAAPE However it is possible to manually create an application data file and add it to the simulator project This might be done in order to add simulation logic to a project or to bypass the CAAPE data entry and compile process for some reason The application data file format can be complex and such files should be created manually only for simple applications The simulator program provides some help in creating an application data file Go to File New Application in the main menu and select the application type Specify the name and location of the new application file The simulator copies a template file to the new application file name and open the new file in the preferred editor Template files must have been included in the last CAAPE install for this to work If the template files are not found an empty application file is created Follow the instructions for editing the new file
141. cations only Table 8 5 CenTraCode II s Run Controls Run Control Description Model Selects the memory model i e the available EPROM and RAM size No Error Code Disables generation of array error checking code in logic equations P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 19 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 8 COMPILING THE APPLICATION To manually compile an application go to the FileView and select the application folder If not already done set the compiler version in the application s Run Controls Go to Actions Compile in the main menu or click the Compile button on the main toolbar The appropriate compiler program for the selected application type and version is started Compile status and error messages are displayed as the compiler runs If compile errors occur PROM files are not generated Correct the errors and recompile Compiler warnings do not keep PROM files from being generated Any output and report files created by the compiler are placed in the appropriate display folders in the FileView 8 8 1 VPI Application CPU PD Inputs include e Application source files VPC HDW created by the user e CPU PD and VSC system software from the selected CAA version Output folder files include e CPU PD application data structures HEX created if the Generate PROM file run control is selected They are split into individual high low address EPROM files for programming CPU PD application m
142. cessible from FileView E Parameters Pa sums Wire Index ES Logic Equations FT Gross Reference Figure 8 8 NVSP CSEX4 Run Controls accessible from ProjectView or FileView P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 17 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files Available run controls depend on the application type General run controls are used to select compiler revision and general options Table 8 1 General Run Controls Run Control Use Run Controls Record Description When this option is selected the Run Controls listed in the source file is used Compile The logic in the source file is compiled Generate PROM File Upon the Successful completion of a compile the PROM file is generated Generate Tracker Information Reserved for Alstom use only Generate GraphSim Information Generate simulation data file used by the Graphical Simulator Include in MMS File Include data for this application when the MMS data file is generated Listing Reports Determines which reports are generated upon a compile Compiler revision Selects the CAA revision to use when compiling this application running ADV etc VPI run controls are used to set compiler options for VPI or VSP applications only Table 8 2 VPI Run Controls Run Control Generate ADV information Description Generates the information necessary to run the ADV application Automatically run
143. ck Plans llle 11 36 11 10 Using Simulation LOGIC inc Re Pas Ehe xe e 11 37 1110 1 Adding Simulation Logic oso ve row 11 37 11 10 1 1 Dummy Applications i 6 0 ric Cr ro Dee 11 37 11 10 1 2 Simulation Logic Files 0 0 a 11 38 11 10 2 Removing Simulation Logic cece ee eeeenee 11 38 11 10 3 Simulating Serial Protocols a 11 39 11 10 3 1 Identifying Serial Protocols 11 39 11 10 3 2 Protocol Definition Files s c Eee RE RE VAR 11 40 11 11 Running the Simulator sha ADA adu weedeat eis ti Ses 11 41 11 11 1 Controlling Simulator Operation aa 11 41 11 11 1 1 Manual GOnDlEol c 3 ee EI DI e PC PCIE EC 11 41 11 11 1 2 SOUDIS 224355 Ads eode eM RU A ira an qr d cae LAN 11 42 11 11 1 3 Breakp intS isc atrio peris oe PRA NAA TOT EE d 11 42 11 11 2 Viewing Setting Variable ValueS 000000 eevee 11 42 11 11 3 Simulating Messages ova cs EC HC On CREDAS 11 43 11 11 3 1 Setting Message Parameters 11 44 Il Lateh 55 ek a KA ote oe Fano comet n 11 44 11 11 4 Simulating Hardware I O 00000 eee 11 45 11 11 4 1 IUS Ls aine do des os treni RUP Ret Sides ean e d 11 45 11 11 4 2 OUIDULIS xoci e Band eg dec ope AGI RU TCR iul od UC AR ER RH 11 47 11 11 4 3 DWACHES icu d oaa neta aa Mendy daas 11 49 11 11 5 Using Track Plan Simulation 0000 0c cece aaaea 11 50 11 11 5 1 Device Display Images liliis 11 50 11 1
144. communications message definition file Named in CSI file LPC Link protocol file communications protocol configuration data Named in CONFIGURATION FILE records in CSS file LOG Data logger definitions file Named in CSI file PRM Logic parameters file declares names of internal logic parameters Named in CSI file NOTICE The contents of this file could also be placed directly in the NV file in most cases NV Non vital logic file Named in CSI file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 12 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure Table 12 12 Report Files File Description CAD CAD annotation file Created by Vital compiler CAQ Reserved for Alstom use only CFN Non vital configuration file See also Application Configuration Files CON Console report files status reports LCS CSEX listing file Lists symbol usages etc Created by non vital compiler LINK CTR Link instructions for non vital linker Created by non vital compiler LRP Link report file Created by non vital linker Table 12 13 Output Files ASCII Hex Format File Description CSE CSEX PROM data file Created by non vital compiler For CAA versions 13F and later should not be used directly use the files created for each PROM chip instead U61 U54 Prom code files for individual chips Table 12 14 Miscellaneous and Temporary Files File Description LOGICREP TMP Temporary logic expressio
145. configure the system hardware and software as well as create the signaling logic for the vital application The independent Application Data Verifier Tool as well as associated procedures must be run and performed prior to any iVPI application program be tested in field commissioning tests Proof of Logic Primordial Logic Review The application of iVPI depends on experienced signaling engineers defining configurations and logic to be implemented for the interlocking application While iVPI guarantees that logic and outputs etc are managed vitally there is no intrinsic check on the correctness or completeness of the signaling logic as it is intended to meet the requirements of the transit or railroad application It is a primary safety requirement that the logic produced for iVPI execution be independently verified as correct and complete through a circuit check type process The check process must be performed by engineers knowledgeable in the requirements of the signaling rules that govern transit railroad operation and independent from the engineering staff that produced the logic Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 8 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Change Process 9 2 ADV COMPARE The ADV Compare utility compares the main report LSV files from two ADV sessions and indicates w
146. countered Format APP app name where app name is the name of an application in the project Example APP VITALAPP1 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 33 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference BOOL Displays the status of the specified logic statement in the current application PROG is an alternative command which does the same thing Formats BOOL display all statements BOOL var name display a single statement by result name BOOL amp stmt num display a single statement by statement number BOOL amp start stmt num amp end stmt num display multiple statements by a range of statement numbers where var name is the name of a result of the equation to display stmt num is the hexadecimal statement number of the statement to display start stmt num and end stmt num are the start and end points of a range of state ment numbers Examples BOOL LAMP OUT2 BOOL amp 1F4 BOOL amp 1F0 amp 1F8 BRK Sets a breakpoint for the specified logic statement in the current application The simulator halts when this logic statement is encountered Formats BRK var name BRK amp stmt num where var name is the name of a result of the equation on which to set the breakpoint stmt num is the hexadecimal statement number of the statement on which to set the breakpoint Examples BRK LAMP OUT2 BRK amp 1F4 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 34 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference CHG Sets a change breakpoint for the specified logic sta
147. created if the Generate GraphSim Information run control is selected Read by the Graphical Simulator to simulate the application Report folder files include Compiler report LCS depending on run controls may include listings of the application logic information on hardware module wiring lists of variables and their usages etc e Configuration report CFN may include versions of graphical components used to create the text source files dates and times of input and output files etc Updated when EPROM files are created to include high low address file checksums and CRCs Tracker file CAQ Reserved for Alstom use only P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 28 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 8 5 1 EPROM Files In VPI CAA 027B and CenTraCode II s CAA 014B and later application system files are split automatically The individual EPROM files are created and shown in the application s Output Folder File checksums and CRCs are reported in the CAAPE s Message Workspace and output to the configuration report CFN file in the Report folder For iVPI NVSP or VPI CSEXA an unsplit application file is created the appropriate communications software file is also copied to the application directory if network features have been selected These files can be downloaded to the board See Section 8 11 Programming Memory Devices for details 8 8 6 Creating VPI Labels The VPI and VPI II compile can automatically genera
148. ctions that make up the project P2512A Rev J Aug 15 3 2 Alstom Signaling Inc 3 2 4 Introduction Using CAAPE Using CAAPE involves the following major steps as shown in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Using CAAPE Step Procedure Create a CAAPE project Develop the applications enter the source data that describes the configuration and operation of the VPI or CenTraCode Il s system This data can be either entered graphically using editing tools provided by CAAPE or textually using an external text editor Compile the applications run the compilers that process the source data and generate the software that is then installed on the system s boards Compiling also produces various reports and other output files for manufacturing support configuration control and use by other Alstom utilities Simulate the applications optional run the simulator program to simulate the operation of the applications and verify that the application logic was written correctly Revise the application logic and recompile if errors are found CAAPE s Graphical Simulator uses information from the compilers to simulate the operation of one or more applications An experienced signaling engineer can lay out a track plan screen and link it to the application data to simulate the operation of field devices such as switches or signals The simulator also allows the signaling engineer to view the state of individual variables and equations as t
149. cue shit ohne ete eso BB be oli te dud ka 11 63 I7 Relay DIOS zu ee Me EIACIDEIA RESE IRAE A toes 11 64 SECTION 12 CAAPE File Structure lllllleesss 12 1 12 1 Introductio 2 oria eec e CR dede e Naman a Mo dn OE ORG 12 1 12 2 CAAPE DIFectoriBs sigs ea Dirk Bah NAG or eC i oe ats ETE n 12 1 12 3 CAA Package Directories 20 0 0 ee 12 2 12 4 Non Vital System Software Files 2 02 00 eee eee eee eee 12 2 12 5 Project Directones s 4 25 08 isu pac ee od gave dede RES PA BNG GANG 12 2 12 6 Listof CAAPEIGAN Files vu 12523 e o edith Oe M e asta thd eo es 12 3 1260 1 GAAPE FICS iis rid EXE REOR ERU REA d 3 DR CR EE Lars 12 3 12 6 2 VPI and iVPI CAA Files soie eR RR Re 12 5 12 6 5 CenTraCode ll s CAA Files 00 Aa 12 12 12 04 SImulatot Fes KARA kk NAN NAAT RAE CC Rc a pa a ig 12 14 SECTION 13 Simulator Reference llllllesss 13 1 18 1 ADOULTIISSSOeOlIOT 33 ahs Aa vation ed mus Jas o aed ars wae d randa 13 1 13 2 Application Data File Format 142 2 932543 ka Kaka re RR EROSE 13 2 13 2 1 General Format Requirements 4 13 2 322 e FileHeader 05 sia ETE REI vx ket eis 13 2 13 2 3 Documentation Section o aces a a NA NABA NAB WK X 13 3 13 2 4 Symbol Types Section 222 000 cece ne eee eee 13 4 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 x Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 13 25 Symbols Section e osos LEM kaaa Le esed cena 13 5 SILO
150. d to display track plans in the Graphical Simulator Gkiifiles PGK application files for download included in some versions of CAAPE Help Help files and tutorials Import Syntax descriptions for use in importing text files into graphical systems SimProtocols Protocol definitions used in the Graphical Simulator Templates Templates used when adding application files in the CAAPE FileView VNNN PGK download program included in some versions of CAAPE e g v210 MMM CAA packages Includes compilers data verifiers and other low e g 032E level tools and the files they use There may be many CAA packages on a given PC depending on the history of CAAPE installations P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 1 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure 12 3 CAA PACKAGE DIRECTORIES Each installed CAA package has a subdirectory below the CAAPE main directory Entries in the Windows Registry list available CAA packages and these registry entries are used to display the list of available compiler versions in the application run controls If a CAA package s directory is deleted the CAA package is still visible in the run controls unless the registry entry was removed as well 12 4 NON VITAL SYSTEM SOFTWARE FILES All non vital system software and protocol files are contained in the Ctcfiles directory They share among all the CAA packages installed on the PC If a given application must use an older version o
151. data is copied to the new location otherwise the data is moved there As with Paste the drop location must be a valid target for the type of data being transferred The mouse cursor changes to indicate when the mouse is over a valid drop location Moving data through Drag and Drop constitutes two independent steps an insertion into the target area followed by a deletion from the source area Two Undo steps are required for such an operation undo the deletion from the source then undo the insertion into the target 7 5 3 10 Changing the Appearance of the Logic Editing Screen Boolean equations can be displayed in ladder logic straight line or drop line format Go to Configure Symbols in the main menu and select the desired format Change the display font by going to Configure Font in the main menu Change the colors of certain statement types by going to Options User Preferences in the main menu and setting the appropriate Colors options The editing window can be zoomed in or out by going to View Zoom in the main menu Split the editing window by going to Windows Split Horizontal or Windows Split Vertical in the main menu The two split windows can be scrolled independently for ease in comparing sections of logic or copying data between sections P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 33 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 4 Inserting Statements To insert a statement Move the caret to the desired location and c
152. dder Logic View PD cycle all applications for one second Jel cycle all applications until each has reached the end of its logic When cycling is next started the applications all start at their first logic statement 11 11 1 2 Scripts Applications can be cycled or stepped using commands in script files as well See Section 11 15 Using Scripts for more details on creating and using scripts 11 11 1 3 Breakpoints Breakpoints can be assigned to logic statements so that the simulator stops cycling when that logic statement is reached This can be useful to examine the state of the system after it has reached a certain point in the logic Set breakpoints by right clicking on an application in the Project Contents window and selecting Simulator Options from its popup menu The user can also open the application s logic scroll to the logic statement and select Breakpoint from its popup menu When a breakpoint is reached all applications stop cycling 11 11 2 Viewing Setting Variable Values To view and set variable values Goto Setup Variables in the main menu The Variables dialog is displayed This dialog can be used to view and set variables change time delays and configure the Watch Window e Open an application s ladder logic view Right click on a logic variable and use popup menu items to set the variable True or False and add it to the Watch Window P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 42 Alstom Signaling In
153. delete all the files in an application s Outputs or Reports folder select Clean Folder from the folders popup menu 8 12 2 Renaming Application Files Go to the FileView and select Rename File from the file s popup menu Enter the new file name Renaming a file not automatically changes any references to the file in INCLUDE records these must be changed manually if they exist Also note that changing a file s standard extension may change how it is handled by the CAAPE and is therefore not recommended 8 12 3 Copying Application Files to Another Location Go to the FileView right click on the application folder the Output or Report subfolder or an individual file and select Copy File s To from the item s popup menu Browse to the target directory and click OK P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 43 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 13 PRINTING LOGIC GRAPHICALLY Application logic that was entered graphically as a CAAPE Ladder Logic component can be viewed or printed using the ladder logic editing window However there may be cases where it is desired to go directly to the logic text VTL or NV files and examine them in a relay oriented graphical format e If the application logic was entered directly as text rather than converted from a Ladder Logic component When it is necessary to double check the accuracy of the component to text Make Files logic conversion process There are four ways to convert logic text files t
154. ds such as Customer Name Contract Name and Equipment Location to provide text fields for use in the printout s border 2 The VPC or CSI file is examined for an INCLUDE record which points to an application logic file and this file is passed to the REDP 3 If a Logic Information File VTI or NVI exists in the folder it is passed to the REDP to provide relay state information normally open and normally closed states for the printout Logic Information Files are automatically generated by the Make Files process in CAAPE version 005C and later The REDP can also read relay state information from a Relay File created by the Graphical Simulator this file must be manually selected once the REDP is started See Section 11 17 Relay Files To start up the REDP without passing it application files go to the main menu and select Actions Utilities REDP without first selecting an application The REDP can also be started directly from the Windows Start menu The REDP s online Help can be accessed from CAAPE by selecting Help REDP from the CAAPE s main menu P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 49 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 50 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Change Process SECTION 9 APPLICATION CHANGE PROCESS 9 1 CHANGE PROCESS The overall change process for Vital applications involves 1 Making the changes to the source graphics and or text files 2
155. e device type and PROM size then click the Calc button Checksums and CRCs are calculated these can be compared against the values in the configuration file Exi FileName C AlstomPrograms Caape Apps pi04b SpCPUU Cale Prom Type VPICPU PD Application v Prom Size pmo v Fill Char FF ka Output Log File C AlstomPrograms4Caape Appsvpi04b15prCPU U18 PROM Type YPI CPU PD Application PROM Size 27010 PROM CRC 7806 PROM Checksum mod 64k 3060 mod 256 60 Figure 10 1 CRC Utility P2512A Rev J Aug 15 10 2 Alstom Signaling Inc Configuration Control 10 2 3 Revision History Application revision history can be stored as special comments in the main VPC or CSI compiler input file Comments were chosen to allow the revision data to be read by the Relay Equivalent Drawing Program without requiring a newer compiler to be used older compilers ignore the data but newer ones VPI CAA 032E 023T CenTraCode ll s CAA 014L or later read the revision data and output it to their configuration reports See the VPI and CenTraCode II s Reference Manuals for details on revision history record formats 10 2 4 Compile Date and Time Compile date and time is saved in generated PROM files and can be accessed from a running system via diagnostic tools In some cases it may be necessary to verify that all the application data in a particular PROM file is the same as that specified by a given set of CAA input files S
156. e or skip over the file without copying it P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 9 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects 5 5 IMPORTING AN AFTC5 TRACK CIRCUIT XML FILE TO A VPI II IVPI HARDWARE SYSTEM The AFTC5 Track Circuit ADT can export its Network and Communications settings for its linkage to a VPI II iVPI hardware system These XML files can be imported into a target hardware system in CAAPE To import AFTC5 XML files follow the procedure in Figure 5 2 Table 5 2 Importing an AFTC5 XML File to a VPI II iVPI Hardware System Step Procedure Create a VPI II iVPI target hardware system that will be linked to the AFTC5 Track Circuit The Vital and non vital processor boards must be named appropriately with 1 the same name as was input in the AFTC5 ADT and be Network enabled Parameter variable names must also follow the CAAPE CAA restrictions of naming conventions for parameter variable names See SECTION 6 1 System and Application Names When ready to start the Import process open the project and right click on the 2 target hardware system The Hardware System must not be open when importing the XML file If it is open the mport menu item will be disabled until you close the system Select the menu item Import AFTC5 XML File Actions View Options Window Help x 7o ER m Project Co E230 NORMAL SYSTEM NPI DN 3 c 230 STANDBY Silla ae Ca 230 VPI VPI i ene Build Make File
157. e popup menu for the target branch to insert a variable onto a branch at the current caret location A new variable is created at that location The new variable is given an initial name of Undefined P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 36 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 6 4 Editing Variable Data The Complement and Toggle Normal State input variable popup menu items can be used to set whether the variable is complemented and whether it has a normal state of Normally Open or Normally Closed Left clicking on the variable opens a special combo box that can be used to enter or select the variable name The variable can also be opened by menu popup or Enter key to get a dialog for setting this data 7 5 6 5 Selecting Equation Data As with other logic items various equation data can be selected using mouse or keyboard The list below describes selection by mouse click but selection of single items by moving the caret over the item and using the Edit Select menu item or spacebar is also possible The entire equation can be selected by clicking its header box comment text or equation coil symbol Asingle branch can be selected by clicking on its horizontal line The branch and all its contents are selected All the data items on a branch can be selected by right clicking on a branch and then using its Select All popup menu item e Aset of parallel branches can be selected by clicking over either of its connecting
158. e I O 11 13 11 8 2 1 IMOSSQUOS i sta tesa ba ip SUR od Dae cR een 11 13 11 8 2 2 Discrete TO Polls s e t e A CERCR OI Pg RRR 11 15 11 8 3 Editing Simulator Options 4 ccc eee 11 16 11 8 4 Using the Variables Dialog 0 0 00 0 a 11 21 11 8 5 Setting Up Variable History ll Aa 11 23 11 8 6 Using the Variable Selector Window 11 24 11 8 7 Setup Using Ladder Logic Views Aa 11 25 11 8 8 Setting Trace and Logging Options 004 11 26 11 8 9 Setting Up Special Messages A AA 11 27 11 9 Tracks Plan Setup 433 2559 aec So x33 hah da vn C e REESE NAA 11 28 TEIT OVEN Wa V rd nds tine ktm ta Een a um Ba 11 28 11 9 2 Adding a Track Plancus ova CR RR RR AREE Ane 11 30 11 93 Track Plan Layout xci Rez DING kA Bhe SABONG 11 31 171 9 3 1 Adding Devices s cus du Ea haa C aia UR a ER ANG 11 31 11 9 3 2 Editing Device Properties 11 33 11 9 3 3 Assigning Variables to Devices 11 35 11 9 3 4 Laying Out Track Secti0ons 11 35 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 viii Alstom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 11 9 3 5 Copying DEVICES iesu e pe tent e C i C AA 11 35 11 9 3 6 Removing Devices 0 llli ees 11 36 11 9 3 7 Device Captions acc cee cc bens e KALA e ds en 11 36 11 9 3 8 Setting Track Plan Size iiid RD RE OR Oa 11 36 11 9 4 Copying Entire Tra
159. e actual component files they are managed by CAAPE which provides graphical editors for entering the component data Graphical components are linked into graphical hardware systems that are the graphical representations of a system When the graphical data for a system is entered a Make Files is performed This converts the graphical data into a set of text files that describe the applications The text files can then be compiled to produce the output and report files Graphical data entry is a front end for producing the text files to be compiled however when using graphics the developer does not have to know the format of all the text records in the input files but instead uses the graphical tools provided by CAAPE The second approach to developing applications is one of directly writing the text based application files and compiling them This bypasses the graphical editing and is provided for compatibility with older CAA versions However some text based input files may contain references to protocol configuration files LPC files or VPI Library files LIB files These files are not textual they require special CAAPE tools to edit The old OS 2 based VPI CAA provided separate protocol editor programs to edit the LPC files but CAAPE now uses graphical components to create and edit LPC data These approaches are discussed in detail in SECTION 7 Using CAAPE Graphics and SECTION 8 Using Application Files 5 1 4 Project Contents and
160. e file is created If a track plan of the same name already exists in the project the program assigns a unique temporary name A track plan can be renamed by selecting it in the Project Contents Window and then clicking on it a second time All track plans in a project must have a unique name P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 30 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 9 3 Track Plan Layout A track plan can be opened in one of two modes Build Design mode to edit its contents and Run mode to perform simulation Opening a track plan in Build mode allows track plan device elements to be placed on the track plan and application variables to be assigned to the elements To open a single track plan in Build mode select the track plan in the Project Contents Window and go to Open Build in its popup menu The Track Plan View is opened in Build mode for editing track plan contents To open all track plans in Build mode go to Open All Build in the Track Plans folder s popup menu 11 9 3 1 Adding Devices When a track plan is open in Build mode a toolbar of available device elements is displayed Figure 11 16 Track Plan Editing Toolbar Available devices are Text Device text caption Input Device generic input with selectable color Click to toggle value of associated simulator variable Output Device generic output with selectable color Displays color based on current value of associated simul
161. e port number from 1 to max e ADDRESS is the message address POSITION is the zero based position of the control message in the list of controls assigned to the port e STATUS is a pointer to an internal variable returned to the simulator Set the variable True to acknowledge that the event was processed ON NVSER RECEIVED INT PORT STRING ADDRESS INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Called when a message is received on the serial port e PORT is the port number from 1 to max ADDRESS is the message address POSITION is the zero based position of the control message in the list of controls assigned to the port e STATUS is a pointer to an internal variable returned to the simulator Set the variable True to acknowledge that the event was processed P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 26 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference ON NVSER SENDING INT PORT STRING ADDRESS INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Called when a message is about to be sent from the serial port PORT is the port number from 1 to max ADDRESS is the message address e POSITION is the zero based position of the indication message in the list of indications assigned to the port STATUS is a pointer to an internal variable returned to the simulator Set this variable True to prevent the simulator from sending the message for example some protocol might require a special message bit to be set first and the data to be transmitted only when another special
162. e text files have not been updated These are warnings that the graphical data and the text files are not in sync but the warnings can be overridden and the compile done anyway if desired P2512A Rev J Aug 15 10 1 Alstom Signaling Inc Configuration Control 10 2 2 Configuration Report Files Configuration files are created and saved in the Reports folder when a compile is done These files have a CFG extension for Vital applications and a CFN extension for non vital They contain various types of revision data including e Graphical component dependencies if applicable e Dates and times of all source text files Dates and times of output EPROM files and any checksum CRC values calculated e Dates and times of system files and any version information that can be extracted from the system files e Version of the CAA package that did the compile e Part numbers and other user entered revision oriented records Some revision data can be checked against data available through the diagnostics in a running hardware system CPU II configuration and revision data can be checked against software on a running CPU II board by using the Download Utility EPROM checksums can be compared against those generated by a PROM programmer checksums and CRCs can be checked against those generated by a separate CRC utility that is supplied with CAAPE Go to Actions Utilities CRC Utilities in the main menu In the CRC utility select the fil
163. e variable delay TRAce ALL Y Trace All TRace CHG Y Trace Change TRace OFF Y No Trace True varname Y Set variable True Val xxx List values of all variables starting with xxx Val List values of all variables P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 58 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 6 7 Special Hardware Input Input Message Variable Considerations In some cases it is necessary to set the state of a hardware input or the value of an input message bit rather than setting the state of its associated variable For example if a variable is a bit in an unlatched serial control its value is automatically set False at the beginning of a cycle unless a new message is received Setting the variable True with a TRUE command may not be reliable the automatic message clearing process may clear the variable before the application logic has a chance to use it To set control message bits or hardware input states directly use these commands described below e MSGINF MSGINT set input message bit False or True and set message flag to indicate new data available The value is input as new message data at the beginning of the next cycle and is held for at least one cycle depending on whether the message is unlatched or latched e HWINFLASH HWINOFF HWINON set hardware input flashing off or on Sets the hardware input state which updates the associated variable at beginning of the next cycle For latched control messages associated
164. ed P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 38 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 10 3 Simulating Serial Protocols In non vital applications the operation of non vital serial and TWC NVTWC messages may depend on the specific protocol selected for the serial port or the TWC NVTWC board For example the usage of special message bits may vary depending on protocol The Graphical Simulator provides two ways to customize simulation based on a selected protocol e Use Message Events to tie specific variables to the behavior of selected messages See Section 11 8 9 Setting Up Special Messages for more information Use protocol specific simulation logic files to simulate protocol operation This approach is described below 11 10 3 1 Identifying Serial Protocols Serial protocols are identified by name in CAAPE input files DT8 K2 MCS1 etc Internally the CAAPE uses numerical values that are cross referenced to information in the protname dat protocol dat and twc dat files in the CAAPE s CTCFILES directory To find the numerical identifier for a non vital serial protocol go to protname dat in the CTCFILES directory and find the value associated with the desired protocol name For TWC NVTWC protocols do the same with twc dat P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 39 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 10 3 2 Protocol Definition Files The protocol identifier is used by the CAAPE to include protocol specific info
165. ed in both the Vital and the non vital compilers Multiple library files can be used in a single compile session Specifying which files to use can be done in a number of ways See the appropriate CAA Reference Manual for details on using library files when compiling VPI ADV versions prior to 032F 023U are not able to read VPI Library file elements in creating consolidation reports P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 14 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 7 SETTINGS AND RUN CONTROLS These are options and additional information needed for compile data verification and other application operations 8 7 1 Settings This information is needed for compiling CenTraCode Il v CSEX1 3 CSEX4 NVSP applications It is set automatically when a graphical Make Files or Build is performed but must be entered manually when the application was created directly from text files Right click on the application and select Settings from its popup menu The Settings dialog is displayed Enter the settings information and click OK Since there can be multiple CSEX or NVSP boards in a system and each application configures one of these boards the user must identify which board in the hardware goes with each application The CSEX or NVSP boards in a system are numbered 1 to 4 and the number of each board is given in the hardware file In this example hardware file record SLOT 7 CSEX3 BOARD 1 31166 175GR00 indicates that there is a CSEX3 board i
166. ed in the seconds column Table 13 3 Project Level Commands Command Capture Meaning Get filename Y Read snapshot file MAX mm MINUTES nn Set cycling limit to specified time SECONDS MAX FOREVER Turn off cycling limit PROJLOG ON Turn on logging all applications PROJLOG OFF Turn off logging all applications PROJRESET AOCD Reset AOCD all applications PROJRESET CPU Reset CPU all applications PROJRESET LAMP Reset filaments all applications PROJRESET SIM Reset All all applications PROJRESET VALUE Reset variables all applications RUN mm MINUTES ss SECONDS Y Cycle all applications SETDATE dd mm yy Y Set current date SETTIME hh mm ss Y Set current time SNap filename Save snapshot file SNAPD filename Y Save snapshot file overwrite allowed PROJTRACE ALL Trace All all applications PROJTRACE CHG Trace Change all applications PROJTRACE OFF No Trace all applications SHOWTEXT text In interactive mode display the specified text up to 255 characters on the status bar P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 53 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference Table 13 3 Project Level Commands Cont Command Capture Meaning UPDATE In interactive mode update the user interface display PAUSE In interactive mode pause execution of the script P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 54 Alstom Signaling Inc 13 6 6 Simulator Reference Command Summary Application Level
167. ede E ef 7 66 7 10 Importing Graphical Data 0 0 c eee ees 7 67 7 10 1 Importing Components from Other Projects 7 67 7 10 2 Importing Systems vasa ye Beh BRR wok daa LG 7 67 7 10 3 Importing an Entire Project axes su vC TE ee ERR KY 7 67 7 10 4 Creating Components from Text Files llli 7 68 7 10 5 Creating Entire Systems from Text Files 7 68 SECTION 8 Using Application Files 0 00 cece eee ees 8 1 8 1 Application Files ce d upP KALAKAS LARAGA Aa REG EE LA 8 1 8 2 CAA Packages an nA NANAIG CSE ee OR oes ay Dn 8 2 8 3 Text Based Work PIOW zs a Ons sad BG en E Ord NE ien 8 3 8 4 Creating Applications 3 x rica pac Clana bo Scerd Meare a S RR A AYANG 8 4 8 4 1 Application TYPES tists ie ue XR RH WE pur e de ie NG 8 4 8 4 2 Adding Applications uuu rw o doce REE ERR Roy ibis 8 5 8 4 3 Importing Applications i o rt dca UR t CR RR Rm a n 8 6 8 4 4 Upgrading VPI Applications to VPI2 4 8 8 8 4 5 Adding Files into Applications 2 a 8 8 8 4 6 Importing Files into Applications 00000 cee eevee 8 8 8 4 7 Combining Text and Components 22i llle 8 8 8 5 Editing Applicauom TllBs uode rag us x odo WEG dra C a way 8 9 8 6 VP IDibtary E8553 3 2 136 eats tao ies 64 KAYA ALAN PESE OGES 4 8 9 8 6 1 Creating Library Files due oma ERE 8 10 8 6 2 Editing Library Files vest ARAERELERERPAYAES NATAS 8 11 8 6 3 Including Library FNGS e
168. ee ooo Figure 7 25 Variable List Filtering Dialog Scope specifies that displayed variables can be contained in the entire project a specified system or a specified component Usages specifies that variables are displayed only if they are used in the specified way And NOT specifies usages which must not be displayed Wildcards specifies that displayed variables must match the entered text pattern including for multi character matching and for single character matching P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 48 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 8 CREATING AND MANAGING GRAPHICAL SYSTEMS Graphical systems represent the user programming of a set of hardware and are built around a graphical hardware component A hardware component should be created before creating the graphical system that uses it 7 8 1 Basic Concepts of Graphical Systems These concepts are explained in detail later 7 8 1 1 Component Linking Since graphical systems represent the programming of a set of hardware each graphical system is built around a hardware component Additional components are assigned or linked to the boards in the hardware component to add logic message and protocol configuration to the system For example a Vital Serial message component might be linked to a Vital Serial board to define its communications a logic component might be linked to a processor board to define its application logic See Section 7 8 3 Adding
169. eens and dialogs press the F7 key for context sensitive help Hardware Properties x r NV Flash Pulse Cancel Flash Rate fo E Pulse Width 200 Pulse2 Width 400 Figure 7 2 Hardware Properties Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 7 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 2 Adding Hardware Modules When the hardware component is opened one or more blank rectangles indicate where modules can be placed Clicking on one of these rectangles selects it To add a module Click on the empty module rectangle to select it and then go to Hardware Insert Module from the main menu or Right click over the empty module rectangle and select Insert Module from the popup menu The Module Type Part Number dialog is displayed Module Type Part Number Type Part Number a 506 015 03 Cancel 31506 015 01 31506 015 02 31506 015 11 31506 015 12 31506 015 13 Description direct wire split w rear panel Figure 7 3 Module Type Part Number Dialog Select the module type and part number and click OK A new module is created and placed in the empty rectangle Figure 7 4 shows a VPI Hardware editing screen with a newly created module Module 1 is the main or System module in VPI The specifications stated for the boards from within the CAAPE GUI Description are for reference only to aid in board selection Actual design parameters should be obtained from the product manuals P
170. eers defining configurations and logic to be implemented for the interlocking application While iVPI guarantees that logic and outputs etc are managed vitally there is no intrinsic check on the correctness or completeness of the signaling logic as it is intended to meet the requirements of the transit or railroad application It is a primary safety requirement that the logic produced for iVPI execution be independently verified as correct and complete through a circuit check type process The check process must be performed by engineers knowledgeable in the requirements of the signaling rules that govern transit railroad operation and independent from the engineering staff that produced the logic Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 11 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 12 Alstom Signaling Inc General SECTION 2 GENERAL 2 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This CAAPE User Manual describes basic CAAPE operation See the VPI iVPI and CenTraCode ll s CAA Reference Manuals for specific application rules text record formats etc This manual contains the basic information needed to understand how to use Alstom s Computer Aided Application Programming Environment software package referred to as either CAAPE or the CAAPE The
171. eference Manual for details on using the consolidation reports 8 10 6 Graphical Logic Verification The ADV verifies that the output PROM data correctly reproduces what was entered in the text files If the Vital logic in the text files was created from a graphical logic component two additional items must be verified 1 Verify that the conversion from graphical logic component to text did not change the equation data 2 Verify that the graphical logic data saved is the same as what the user entered i e that the logic editor does not save something different from what it displays In CAAPE version 005C and later a check is made to verify that the graphical ladder logic was correctly converted to text before compiling When the ADV is started an independent program reads the logic text files and converts them back into ladder logic format This data is compared to the contents of the original logic component and the results are passed to the ADV to be included in its consolidation report In CAAPE version 005F and later it is possible to generate a graphical printout of the logic directly from the text files using a diverse independent facility By looking at this independent printout one can verify that the logic that was created is the intended logic and thus satisfy item 2 See Section 8 13 Printing Logic Graphically for details 8 10 7 Note on Sum of Products Format This is an expanded format compatible with VPI or VSP Vit
172. egrated Vital Processor Interlocking product LDO Lamp Drive Output board LPC Link Protocol Command LSV CAAPE output file LVC CAAPE output file MMS Maintenance Management System MRU Most Recently Used MVSC A specific Vital Serial Controller board VSC application that provides a means of communicating to and from AF Track Circuit modules NVI Non Vital Input board NVO Non Vital Output board NVSP Non Vital System Processor the Non Vital processor board in an iVPI system NVTWC Non Vital Train to Wayside Communication PGK Programmable Genrakode PROM Programmable Read Only Memory programmable memory devices that store firmware RAM Random Access Memory this part of memory temporarily stores information that is constantly being changed in the computer here words may be stored written or read retrieved in any order at random REDP Relay Equivalent Drawing Package SBO Single Break Output board P2512A Rev J Aug 15 2 5 Alstom Signaling Inc General Table 2 1 Common Abbreviations and Glossary Cont Term Definition or Explanation TWC Train to Wayside Communications User An experienced signaling engineer Validation CENELEC 3 1 67 the activity applied in order to demonstrate by test and analysis that the product meets in all respects its specified requirements Verification CENELEC 3 1 68 the activity of determination by analysis and test at each phase of t
173. emory devices They are also read by the Application Data Verifier to prove that application data was created correctly e CPU PD system software HEX copied from the CAA package directory File is split into high low address EPROM files for programming CPU PD system memory devices e High low address CPU PD EPROM files e Vital Serial application data structures VB1 VB2 for programming the Vital serial boards e Vital serial system software HEX can be used to program the Vital serial boards e Graphical Simulator data file SMV created if the Generate GraphSim Information run control is selected Read by the Graphical Simulator to simulate the application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 20 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files Report folder files include Compiler report L VC depending on run controls may include listings of the application logic information on hardware module wiring lists of variables and their usages etc e Configuration report CFG may include versions of graphical components used to create the text source files dates and times of input and output files etc Updated when EPROM files are created to include high low address file checksums and CRCs e ADV data file LADV created if the Generate ADV Information run control is selected Read by the Application Data Verifier to link variable names to variable locations so the ADV can output readable names in its report
174. eractively the following commands are available e SHOWTEXT causes the specified text to be displayed on the program s status bar Use this command to display user messages or instructions PAUSE causes the program to update the user interface display and temporarily stop execution at this point in the script Use this command to temporarily stop and view current status of track plans or other windows or perform some operations not in the script UPDATE causes the program to update the user interface display These commands are ignored in non interactive execution The RUN CYC and SIM commands are executed through the user interface in interactive mode so the display changes as the simulator cycles For example perform some operations update the display UPDATE perform some more operations tell the user to do something and then pause script execution SHOWTEXT Signal should be clear Set XX DI True PAUSE When execution is resumed the script starts here In non interactive mode the user interface updates only at the very end of the script P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 31 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 6 3 Project Application Commands Some commands are meant for the entire simulator project others are meant for a specific application in the project When a project has multiple applications the specific application being addressed must be identified This is done by using spec
175. es linking graphical components to their associated hardware boards it is recommended to create the hardware component and assign its boards before using the System Wizard P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 4 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics The available component types are shown in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Component Types CenTraCode ll s Hardware Hardware Components Hardware for a CenTraCode Il s system iVPI Hardware Hardware for an iVPI System VPI Hardware Hardware for a VPI System ATP Vital Serial Message Message Components Message data passed between multidrop VSC board and ATP units or PGK system Code Rate Generator Message Message data passed through CRG board Datalog Message Application data log message on CSEX NVSP or CenTraCode ll s CPU Genrakode Track Processor Message Message data passed through GTP board Non Vital Serial Message Serial message data sent or received by CSEX NVSP or CenTraCode II s CPU Train to Wayside Message Message data passed through TWC NVTWC boards Vital Serial Message Vital serial message data passed between two VSC boards point to point or between network VSOE nodes VPI CSEX Message Data passed through DPRAM between the CPU PD CPU Il or VSP board and a CSEX or NVSP board CenTraCode II V amp S Logic Logic Components Non vital logic on CSEX NVSP or CenTraCode Il s CPU
176. es various aspects of configuration control both for application data and for CAAPE itself 10 2 APPLICATION DATA 10 2 1 Graphical Components A multi line text field can be used to store version and description data for graphical system and component elements Application Revision History can be entered graphically through the Revision History editing tab for CPU PD CPU II VSP CSEX NVSP or CenTraCode CPU boards Revision data can include a revision ID date author summary text and multiple lines of details text The data is exported to the application s main input file where it can be read by newer compilers for output to the configuration report and read by the Relay Equivalent Drawing Program for output to its relay equivalent printout or DXF files See Section 10 2 3 Revision History When Make Files or Build is performed on a graphical system the dates and times of its graphical components are saved along with the dates and times of the text files created from them This data can be displayed by right clicking on an application folder in the FileView and selecting Show Graphical Dependencies from its popup menu The data is also automatically saved in the configuration report when the application data is compiled If text files are created from graphics and then their contents are manually changed a warning is displayed when trying to compile the application A message is also displayed when the graphical data is changed but th
177. ess EPROM files for direct memory device programming The CPU application and system software files are split automatically if the application run controls are set to have the ADV run automatically after compile Otherwise the files must be split manually Go to the FileView and select the application folder or the HEX compiler output file in the application s Output folder Go to Actions Utilities PROM Split in the main menu or click the PROM Split button on the main toolbar The individual EPROM files are created and shown in the application s Output Folder File checksums and CRCs are reported in the CAAPE s Message Workspace and output to the configuration report CFG file in the Report folder See Section 8 11 Programming Memory Devices for details P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 26 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 8 4 VPI2 CPU2 and iVPI VSP Comm Applications Comm subsystem Inputs include e Application source files VCC created by the user Comm system software from a shared directory in CAAPE Output folder files include e Application data structures system software HEX created if the Generate PROM file run control is selected can be downloaded to the board or can be split into individual high low address EPROM files for programming application memory devices e High low address EPROM files Report folder files include Compiler report LCC network information etc e Configurat
178. essages that are unlatched i e messages whose contents are cleared at the beginning of a cycle For such messages when new message data is input it is cleared after one cycle and the parameters in the grid reverts to False values To prevent this from happening check the Latch check box Internal message data is still cleared but the parameters listed in the dialog remain at their last entered values P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 44 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 11 4 Simulating Hardware I O 11 11 4 1 Inputs To view and edit the input ports on a hardware board select an input board in the hardware and go to Edit Inputs in its popup menu The Inputs Edit dialog is displayed for that board This dialog can be used to view and edit the input ports of a hardware input board INPUTS Module 1 Slot 11 DI loj xl Close Figure 11 22 Inputs Edit Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 45 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator The grid shows the parameter names and current state of each input port on the board To simulate new input states select new state and time values and click Update The new states become active when the application reaches the point in its logic where it processes inputs Available input states are described in Table 11 1 Table 11 1 Parameter Status Descriptions Status Description FLOAT The FLOAT state disconnects the h
179. et skips Skips can be set at selected logic statements so that the statement is not executed when the simulator runs Options MSF YARD xi Break Points Monitors Equation Skips Simulation Relay File m New By Result Description Remove Figure 11 8 Simulator Options Skips Select equations by number or result name and click Add Use Remove and Remove All to remove selected skip equations from the list Skips can also be set through the application s Ladder Logic View P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 18 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator Use the Simulation tab to set some aspects of simulation cycling Options MSF YARD Break Points Monitors Equation Skips Simulation Relay File r Cycling Time msec Simulator N00 Save v Enabled Figure 11 9 Simulator Options Simulation Cycling Time can be used to change the cycle time of a non vital application non vital application cycle time is variable depending on how many equations must be solved Simulator cycling can also be disabled to turn off an application but let other applications run normally P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 19 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator Use the Relay File tab to setup relay file variables and generate the relay file The relay file can be used to provide relay states for the Relay Equivalent Drawing Package REDP This relay file is needed onl
180. ev J Aug 15 13 29 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 5 4 Sample Event Handler Handler for a non vital serial protocol where a particular special message bit is set when a message was sent SUBROUTINE ON NVSER RECEIVED INT PORT STRING ADDRESS INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Set the bit 2 in the first and only special message CALL SET NVSERSP POSN PORT POSITION 2 TRUE Acknowledge the event BOOL STATUS TRUE END ON NVSER RECEIVED Handler for a non vital serial protocol where on sending an indication a bit on the special message with the same address is set SUBROUTINE ON NVSER SENT INT PORT STRING ADDRESS INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Set bit 3 on the special message with the same address CALL SET NVSERSP ADDR PORT ADDRESS TRUE TRUE Acknowledge the event BOOL STATUS TRUE END ON NVSER SENT See Section 13 4 Predefined Simulator Logic Functions for special message bit handling P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 30 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 6 SCRIPT FILE FORMAT 13 6 1 General Format One command is allowed per line Command text is case insensitive Blank lines are allowed Comments can be entered by placing a character at the leftmost column of a line See How To Use Scripts in the simulator s Help file for more details on specific script file commands 13 6 2 Special Considerations for Interactive Execution If a script file is being executed int
181. f installing and preparing to use CAAPE Section 5 CAAPE PROJECTS This section describes how to use CAAPE projects to organize and manage application data Section 6 GENERAL RULES AND TECHNIQUES This section describes some general rules for entering application data Section 7 USING CAAPE GRAPHICS This section provides information on using CAAPE s graphical editing tools to enter application data Section 8 USING APPLICATION FILES This section describes how to use application input output and report files Section 9 APPLICATION CHANGE PROCESS This section describes the process of making changes to an existing application especially as it applies to Vital applications Section 10 CONFIGURATION CONTROL This section describes the various configuration control features available in CAAPE Section 11 USING THE GRAPHIC SIMULATOR This section describes how to use the Graphical Simulator tool Section 12 CAAPE FILE STRUCTURE This section is a guide to the directory structure of CAAPE and the files that CAAPE uses Section 13 SIMULATOR REFERENCE This section gives detailed information on some simulator file formats P2512A Rev J Aug 15 Alstom Signaling Inc P2512A Rev J Aug 15 Alstom Signaling Inc MANUAL SPECIAL NOTATIONS In Alstom manuals signal word panels are used to convey special safety and informational messages Danger Warning and Caution Signal Word Panels include a safety alert symbol in
182. f non vital system software the appropriate files must be in Ctcfiles when the compile is done This can be accomplished by e Copying the system software files in and out of the directory e Having multiple directories and renaming the desired one to Ctcfiles just before compiling It is not necessary to restart CAAPE before compiling when Ctcfiles contents are changed 12 5 PROJECT DIRECTORIES All files related to a CAAPE project are contained in the same directory with these exceptions e Manually edited main application text files VPC and CSI may contain path information in their INCLUDE records e Manually edited references to protocol configuration LPC files in CONFIGURATION FILE records may contain path information e References to VPI Library files may contain path information These situations might occur if it was desired to share certain standard files among many applications However references to files outside the project directory must be used with care because the links to these files can be broken if the files are moved or deleted P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 2 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure 12 6 LIST OF CAAPE CAA FILES The list of CAAPE CAA files includes the files used by the CAAPE and its associated CAA packages All files are generally placed in a single project directory unless otherwise noted 12 6 1 CAAPE Files Project files contain data for the entire project projname
183. features diverge OVERVIEW MANUAL MUST BE READ IN ENTIRETY The Overview manual P2086G for VPI P2511G for VPI Il P2521A for iVPI must be read in its entirety prior to any operational and or maintenance actions as it contains important safety messages and pertinent information Failure to comply may result in an unsafe condition or accident causing death or serious injury MODIFICATION OF CAAPE AND CAA PROHIBITED No modification of CAAPE CAA or any of its component programs is allowed because any program change could compromise the safety performance of the system Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 2 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions VITAL COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRE UNIQUE LINK AND BLOCK SETTINGS Failure to properly assign maintain and control unique Link and Block settings for Vital communications within VPI systems can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment The message link and block values must be assigned such that the combination of these values is unique throughout the network Alstom strongly recommends that strict control of the Link and Block settings be maintained so that the expected configuration of all VPIs in the train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control s
184. ference 13 2 7 4 1 Protocol Subsection The subsection format is PROTOCOLS serialport1 protocol1 serialport2 protocol2 e serialport is a serial port number e protocol is a protocol number corresponding to the protocol in protocol dat or twc dat in the CAAPE s CTCFILES directory 13 2 7 4 2 Inputs Subsection The subsection format is INPUTS port1 input1 sinkinput1 port2 input2 sinkinput2 e port is the input port number e inputis the name of the input variable For CenTraCode ll s CPU boards there are source and sink input names for all other input boards there is a single input name For example 1 1 DI INPUTS 1 IN1 DI 2 IN2 DI P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 11 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 7 4 3 Outputs Subsection The subsection format is OUTPUTS port1 output1 lt controlvars1 gt port2 output2 lt controlvars2 gt e port is the output port number e output is the output variable name e controlvars are pairs of control functions and their corresponding variables depending on board type FLASH flash variable FLASH2 flash2 variable FLASHB flashb variable FLASH2B flash2b variable PULSE pulse variable PULSE2 pulse2 variable ON STATE on state variable FLASH STATE flash state variable NONPROT non protect variable CK ck variable HOT LO CK hot check variable COLD LO CK cold check variable For examp
185. ferent applications so that as the simulator cycles data it is automatically transferred from the output message to its linked input message To link output to input messages go to Setup Message Links in the main menu The Message Links dialog appears Message Links x Source Application MSF_YARD x Source Message Type veics EX VPI m Source Messages Destination Application MSF_YARDCSX1 Destination Messages VPICSEX CSEX CSEX Link Unlink All Unlink All App Auto Link Close ik Figure 11 4 Message Links Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 13 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator Select a source application a destination application and a source message type Available source messages appear in the upper Source Messages list and available destination messages appear in the lower Destination Messages list Select a source and a destination message then click the Link button The destination message s status display changes to Linked When the simulator runs data in the source message is automatically transferred to the destination message Certain messages such as VPI to CSEX can be linked automatically since the simulator has enough information to know how to link them Click the Auto Link button on the Message Links dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 14 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 2 2 Discrete I O Points Li
186. fication and validation process Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment FSSVT SIGNATURE VALUES MUST BE VERIFIED Verify through Vital signatures that FSSVT values that were not intentionally changed have retained their original signature values Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 10 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions FSSVT MODIFICATIONS MUST BE VERIFIED All FSSVT modifications are safety critical and must be verified using the AlsDload program or the Application Data Verifier program within CAAPE to determine whether the iVPI application PROM code data has been encoded as specified by the AlsDload FSSVT compiler Refer to Alstom Publication P2521A iVPI Product Overview Manual sections Application Verification The basis of the application of iVPI is to use a tool to configure the system hardware and software as well as create the signaling logic for the vital application The independent Application Data Verifier Tool as well as associated procedures must be run and performed prior to any iVPI application program be tested in field commissioning tests Proof of Logic Primordial Logic Review The application of iVPI depends on experienced signaling engin
187. g 15 2 1 through 2 8 Aug 15 3 1 through 3 6 Aug 15 4 1 through 4 8 Aug 15 5 1 through 5 16 Aug 15 6 1 through 6 4 Aug 15 7 1 through 7 68 Aug 15 8 1 through 8 50 Aug 15 9 1 through 9 10 Aug 15 10 1 through 10 6 Aug 15 11 1 through 11 64 Aug 15 12 1 through 12 14 Aug 15 13 1 through 13 60 Aug 15 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 Alstom Signaling Inc P2512A Rev J Aug 15 Alstom Signaling Inc PREFACE NOTICE OF CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION Information contained herein is confidential and is the property of Alstom Signaling Inc Where furnished with a proposal the recipient shall use it solely to evaluate the proposal Where furnished to a customer it shall be used solely for the purposes of inspection installation or maintenance Where furnished to a supplier it shall be used solely in the performance of the contract The information shall not be used or disclosed by the recipient for any other purposes whatsoever VPI and iVPI are registered trademarks of Alstom Signaling Inc All other trademarks referenced herein are trademarks of their respective owners FOR QUESTIONS AND INQUIRIES CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICE Address Alstom Signaling Inc 1025 John Street West Henrietta NY 14586 USA Website www alstomsignalingsolutions com Email websiteinfo alstomsignalingsolutions com Phone 1 800 717 4477 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 Alstom Signaling Inc REVISION LOG Release Rev
188. g 15 11 1 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 1 2 Why Perform Simulation Simulation is primarily a way to verify that the application logic works as intended by exercising the logic equations in a simulated operating environment This allows finding and correcting logic errors at an early stage of development saving money and time on the project The Graphical Simulator has the added advantage of letting a track plan be set up that represents the interlocking and running the simulator to illustrate its operation This can provide a more efficient and easy to understand way of viewing application behavior Track plans could also be used to train personnel on the interlocking s operation or to demonstrate to a customer that the interlocking operates as expected 11 1 3 Text Based vs Graphical Simulators The Graphical Simulator is available in CAAPE 005A and later It uses data provided in a special file produced by the Vital or non vital compiler Compilers that were released with CAAPE versions earlier than 005A are not capable of creating this file Earlier CAA versions provided a text based simulator that was used to simulate operation of a single application at a time The interface for this simulator involves entering text commands and viewing text responses and is fully described in online and printed reference manuals P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 2 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 2
189. g Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 11 RUNNING THE SIMULATOR 11 11 1 Controlling Simulator Operation Individual applications can be cycled in various modes or stepped for a specified number of statements All applications can be cycled simultaneously either for a specified period of time or until the user requests cycling to stop 11 11 1 1 Manual Control Go to View Control Panel in the main menu to open the Control Panel dialog REF Application MSF YARD S Mode Cycles Save Run Stop Figure 11 20 Control Panel Select one or all applications and enter the desired cycling or stepping mode Click Run on the Control Panel or Start on the toolbar To stop the simulator click Stop on the Control Panel or Stop on the toolbar Once a cycling mode is specified and saved the Control Panel can be closed and the Start and Stop buttons on the toolbar used to start and stop cycling P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 41 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator Some cycling options can be selected directly from the toolbar They can be used to resynchronize applications to a common starting point or to jog the simulator in short steps while looking for a particular event or examining details of operation They do not affect the cycling mode selected through the Control Panel using the Start button goes back to the previous mode Toolbar options are a single step the logic currently displayed in a La
190. hat elements of the application have changed This might be used to help determine what parts of the application to concentrate on when testing 9 2 1 Preparing to Use ADV Compare When using the ADV Compare utility save the old LSV report in a separate location for later use When CAAPE runs the ADV it automatically renames the last copy of the LSV file and gives it a BKV extension Select ADV Compare report options by setting the ADV Compare run controls for the Vital application 9 2 2 Running ADV Compare To run the ADV Compare utility 1 Select the FileView tab 2 Open the Report folder of the Vital application 3a Select the L SV file by left clicking on it Or 3b Select the Vital application MAIN folder by left clicking 4 Go to Actions Utilities VPI ADV Compare from the main menu 5 Identify the old LSV file to compare against the new one The ADV Compare saves its results in a file with extension SYM in the Report folder When comparing applications prepared using different CAA versions it is best to do the compare using the CAA with the newest version The newest version is aware of any file format changes but the older version may not P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 9 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Change Process THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 10 Alstom Signaling Inc Configuration Control SECTION 10 CONFIGURATION CONTROL 10 1 INTRODUCTION This section describ
191. he applications run Verify the Vital applications use the Application Data Verifier ADV to analyze the compiler output files and verify that their contents correspond to what the signaling engineer originally entered For example the ADV proves that the compiler did not change the meaning of the application logic equations from what was intended Program the boards using the compiler generated output files A download program is provided for those boards that support programming through a serial connection other boards require physical programming and installation of EPROM chips Perform revision control of the application data P2512A Rev J Aug 15 3 3 Alstom Signaling Inc Introduction 3 2 5 CAA Versions Certain low level tools such as compilers and application data verifiers may be tied to a particular version of system software because they create or read output data that is compatible only with that version When a new version of system software is created these tools must be updated as well Over time a signaling engineer may have to maintain a number of systems each having its own version of system software and therefore requiring a different compiler The CAAPE supports this by using CAA versions The set of tools that go with a particular version of system software comprise a CAA package The CAAPE itself is a top level program that can manage more than one CAA package and the low level tools i
192. he data is added in series at that location e One or more variables and branch data combinations to the vertical line of a parallel branch combination A new branch is added to the combination and the data is placed there One or more results from one equation to another Variable and result names are copied to the Clipboard as plain text as well as in their internal format and can therefore be pasted into grids or other controls that accept text data Text names from a grid or other source can be pasted onto an equation branch to insert variables of those names 7 5 6 8 Variable Selection List When a single input variable or result is selected a combo box with available names is displayed To change the name choose one from the drop down list or type in the new name and press the Enter key To close the list without changing the variable or result name press the Esc key or click outside the boundary of the combo box Right clicking over the combo box produces a popup menu Click Accept to change the name of the input variable or result Click Set Filtering to change the variable type filtering 7 5 6 9 Setting Internal Variable Types Equation variable or result names can be declared as internal variables directly from the logic view by using the appropriate popup menu P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 38 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 6 10 Setting Relay States Boolean equations are comparable to circuits in which
193. he life cycle that the requirements of the phase under the consideration meet the output of the previous phase and that the output of the phase under consideration fulfills its requirements VCO CAAPE output file VCR CAAPE output file VPI Alstom s Vital Processor Interlocking product VPI2 A Vital application for the CPU II processor board in a VPI II system VRD Vital Relay Driver board VSC Vital Serial Controller board that provides a means for exchanging the states of Vital interlocking functions between interlocking systems in a Vital manner VSOE Vital Serial over Ethernet a network based method of exchanging the states of Vital interlocking functions between interlocking systems in a Vital manner VSP Vital System Processor the Vital processor board in a WIU or iVPI system ZC Zone Controller See SECTION 12 CAAPE File Structure for tables that define and summarize the various file extensions used by the CAAPE P2512A Rev J Aug 15 2 6 Alstom Signaling Inc General 2 6 RELATED PUBLICATIONS Table 2 2 Related Publications List Document No Title P2086B VPI vital Processor Interlocking Control System Operation and Maintenance Manuals Volumes 1 4 P2086G VPI vital Processor Interlocking Control System Product Overview Manual P2326B CenTraCode II s Communications System Operation and Maintenance Manual P2511B VPI II Vital Processor Interlocking Control Syste
194. he track segment Note that if multiple track segments are all assigned the same input variable clicking on one of the segments is enough to change the state of all of them The input variable change caused by clicking on one segment is transmitted to the rest of the segments as well 11 11 5 3 Setting Device Modes Special modes such as Out of Correspondence or Filament Broken are available for some device types To set such modes select them from the device s popup menu 11 11 5 4 Device Timing Switch and SA signal devices mimic the throw time of their real life counterparts Setting a drive variable True in the simulator therefore does not cause the corresponding device position variable to be set True immediately The simulator must be cycled for a sufficient amount of time for the transition to occur P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 51 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 12 USING LADDER LOGIC Ladder logic is a relay based format for displaying application logic Ladder logic can be viewed for any of the applications being simulated whether or not the logic was originally entered graphically in CAAPE To display the application logic in ladder logic format go to Open Logic in the application s popup menu A Ladder Logic View is opened for the application This view can be used to examine the contents and state of the application logic and to set certain options such as breakpoints or relay file marking Figure 11
195. here the variable is used in the application For example go to the Find Usages Logic Result item to open the application s Ladder Logic View and go to the equation which uses the variable as a result See Section 11 9 3 3 Assigning Variables to Devices for using the Variable Selector in track plan setup P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 24 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 7 Setup Using Ladder Logic Views Ladder logic is a relay based format for displaying application logic To display the application logic in ladder logic format select Open Logic from the application s popup menu in the Project Contents Window A Ladder Logic View is opened for the application Breakpoints and changepoints monitors skips and equation time delays can be set from the Ladder Logic View Right click over a statement header and select the appropriate item from its popup menu The popup menus of selected variables can be used to set them True or False or add them to the Watch Window or History Window To close the ladder logic view window click File Close in the main menu click Close in the view window s system menu or click the X close button in the window s upper right corner See Section 11 12 Using Ladder Logic for more details on Ladder Logic Views P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 25 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 8 Setting Trace and Logging Options Trace options specify what equations are li
196. hoose the desired statement type from the main Insert menu e Right click over empty space on the logic view and choose the desired statement type from the popup menu Click on the appropriate button on the logic toolbar move the mouse to the desired location and click there A dialog appears for entry of the statement s basic properties For example the following Equation Data dialog is used to enter the basic properties of a time delay equation Equation Data xj Results Name Result Cancel JISEC TICK Add gt gt 1SEC TICK 1SEC OLD APPLNV OK Filters m Equation Type m Normal State Tine Dely 5 Sic Closed Hide Properties Comment Minutes Seconds Milliseconds p z m Properties Figure 7 16 Time Delay Equation Data P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 34 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Enter or select one or more result names in the Name control then click Add to add the result to the equation Click the Filters button to select filtering options for the result name drop down list Normal State is the quiescent state of the result relay coil and is used for display and printing purposes Comment can be used to enter a text comment that describes the equation Minutes Seconds and Milliseconds specify the time delay The Function Statement dialog is used to enter function statement properties Function Statement a m Data Variable Names
197. ial records APP appname All commands following this record are meant for application appname until a PROJECT record or another APP record is encountered PROJECT All commands following this record are meant for the entire project until an APP record is encountered For example PROJECT project specific commands APP app1 commands for application app1 APP app2 commands for application app2 If there is only one application in the project the APP records are not necessary P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 32 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 6 4 Alphabetic List of Commands Statement numbers are hexadecimal Elapsed times refer to simulation time not necessarily real time as perceived by the user For example a one second VPI cycle may execute in much less than one real second if the application logic is small ADD DEL Controls the use of simulation logic files for the current application Simulation logic files are files of supplemental logic that are added to the actual application logic in order to simulate external events Format ADD file name add a simulation logic file DEL remove all simulation logic files where file name is the name of the file A standard extension of VSQ is added Example ADD SIM1 APP Sets the current application all application specific commands following this record apply to the named application In effect until another APP or a PROJECT record is en
198. ical Simulator The advantage of using track plans for simulation is that expected field device operation can be viewed as the simulator runs providing a more intuitive and less abstract way of testing application logic than monitoring variables and analyzing logic equations The lower level simulator features are still available to provide more detail if needed Building a track plan for simulation involves laying out the field devices and setting their properties Device properties include optional text captions to identify the device signal colors switch and track orientations and various other display attributes they also include the simulator variables that are associated with various device functions For example to simulate the operation of a given switch device it is necessary to identify e outputs that drive the switch normal or reverse inputs that are returned indicating that the switch is in position Once the track plan is built it is placed in Run mode to perform simulation In this mode when the simulator executes the application logic it updates the variables representing outputs from the system to the field devices similarly when a field device changes state it sends the appropriate inputs back to the application Error or other conditions can be set for selected devices on the track plan screen A simple example is a track device the user can click on the track device on the track plan screen to change its state from
199. ication folder and files iVPI NVSP hardware board iVPI NVSP application folder and files CenTraCode Il s System CTC2s system folder CenTraCode Il s CPU board CTC2s application folder and files P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 64 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics To build a system right click on the system in the ProjectView and select Build from its popup menu To build application s for a single board right click on the board in the ProjectView Select the appropriate Build item from its popup menu If a board contains multiple subsystems e g Main and Comm for CPU Il separate menu items are available for each It is possible to create text files from the graphics without running the compilers right away Select the Make Files item in the system s popup menu When performing an initial build the last used board specific CAA version is automatically used to do the compile This is generally the version that uses the latest available Vital system software If a different CAA version is desired or to use non default compiler options do a Make Files first to create the applications and then go to the FileView and set the run controls for each application that was created See SECTION 8 Using Application Files for more details P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 65 Alstom Signaling Inc 7 9 1 Build Names Using CAAPE Graphics When application data is generated for a system application files are
200. in the selected application folder The remaining text files can be added or imported and then the application can be compiled P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 8 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 5 EDITING APPLICATION FILES Edit an application file in the FileView by right clicking on it and selecting Edit from its popup menu or by double clicking on its icon Text files are opened in the default editor specified in CAAPE s User Preferences VPI Library files are opened in a special Library File Editor dialog LPC files cannot be opened directly They must be created graphically and then exported into the application 8 6 VPI LIBRARY FILES VPI Library files contain libraries of Vital or non vital application logic routines that can be individually retrieved and used as compiler input Their purpose is to provide generic application logic for commonly used operations that might be performed in many applications They can be written using generic variable names that are replaced by the actual variable names when the logic is used This allows the same set of logic statements to be used in many applications without forcing the applications to use the same variable names Since the logic routines exist in a single library file that can be kept in a central location they are more easily maintained and kept consistent across all the applications that use them Library files consist of one or more library members which are individual
201. ince compile date and time are part of the PROM file contents recompiling the same input data generally does not produce identical PROM files because the date and time are different for each compile A feature is available VPI CAA 029B 023l and later CTC2 s CAA 014E and later for manually entering date and time values to match those of a previous compile The manually entered data is substituted for the PC system clock date and time that are normally used Assuming all other application data and system software versions are identical recompiling with the manually entered date and time then produce identical PROM contents Manually entered date and time values are listed in CAA report files as well Manual date and time should be used with caution under special circumstances only compile date and time may be an important aspect of configuration control To manually enter compile date and time values right click on the application folder in the CAAPE s FileView and click Set Manual Date Time A dialog box is displayed for entering compile date and time values to be stored in PROM These values are good for only one compile then they have to be entered again or the next compile makes use of PC system clock data as usual This is done to prevent accidentally doing multiple compiles with the same manual date and time set To clear previously entered manual date and time values before doing a compile right click on the application folder in
202. ing Drop Line symbols The result AAWVR is displayed at the right Three elements are AND ed together to get the result the single variable AWRCS at the left and two parallel combinations of two branches each As text the logic of the equation is BOOL A4WVR 4WRCS 4WH N B4TP N A4TP AAWVR 124NWC 4CTP 124RWC A2TP e is an AND operation e is an OR operation e N is a logical complement NOT WP VPILogic Queens1 VTL STMT 975 Boolean 4WRCS 4WH B4TP 124NWC 4CTP agp 124RWC A2TP sh a Figure 7 15 Ladder Logic Boolean Equation Display P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 28 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 1 2 Comments Comment are text only statements that are used to document the logic but do not affect its operation Multiple lines of text can be entered 7 5 1 3 Group Records A group record gives a user entered name to a related group of logic statements Each group record has a corresponding Group End statement any statements between the group record and the group end are considered part of the group Group records are useful for identifying groups of statements that should be manipulated as a unit All the statements in a group can be moved copied or deleted at once Like comments group records do not affect logic operation 7 5 1 4 Function Statements Function statements are text only statements that represent various types of specialized or advanced
203. ing Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 6 SIMULATOR USER INTERFACE Ep A75 File Project Logic Setup View Options Window Help o s aj gt ile aa D Lsa Watch Window Statement 0095 TF2R RCVDAD E FALSE TF2 R RCVD ID E F AR13B T AR13B TRUE TF2 R RCVD ID N F TF2 NEW D ms TF2 NEW ID MSG F TF2 OCC T TF2 TRN RDY F Statement 0096 IF TF2 R RCVD ID E F TRUE TF2 R RCVD ID N F TRUE Statement NNG7 Starting simulation Simulation stopped mass A Figure 11 1 Graphical Simulator Main Window P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 5 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator The Graphical Simulator s user interface has these elements e Watch Window upper left side shows the current value of selected variables Project Contents Window middle left side shows the contents of the simulator project the applications including their messages and hardware O boards the track plans and the scripts History Window lower left side shows the values over time of selected variables Message Window bottom shows status and error information Includes one tab for the entire project and one tab for each application in the project Edit Area upper right displays ladder logic and track plan view windows In Figure 101 a logic window is being displayed The Watch Project Contents History and Message windows are all dockable
204. ing System Requirements 3 5 Table 3 3 ISEDP TFequirererils 5 uoa KN Paa NAN cO Y Ende PX 43 e 3 6 Table 4 1 Install GAAPE Software 2 20 223 92 5 NGAY aurea ore eae seg NG 4 2 Table 5 1 Importing e Projects cones Data ea etu iia und e dels dehet gos 5 9 Table 5 2 Importing an AFTC5 XML File to a VPI II IVPI Hardware SYSIOM lt 2 24 54 eee ha ioe OST LL E EPI d LEA AHA KG 5 10 Table 7 1 Creating a New System eese 7 1 Table 7 2 COMPONENT TYPES eani naa pa HE BAAL KAHANI P4 qax Ue mA 7 5 Table 7 3 ProjectView vs FileView Contents After Build 7 64 Table 7 4 Build Names Examples 224 252 ke 23 opi qom WE Pee BO 6 7 66 Table 8 1 General Run Gontrolss uuo fear pe sa AA Baha err pacta ka eod de 8 18 Table 8 2 MP ur CONG e uiro p NGA BANG GG Ss Ie PUD BIN RIPE KA 8 18 Table 8 3 ADV Compare Run Controls lilii ellen 8 19 Table 8 4 CenTraCode Il v Run Controls a 8 19 Table 8 5 CenTraCode ll s Run Controls 20000000 000 8 19 Table 8 6 Verification PROCESS i514 ov ee oe Kag NAMANA DEAN GA 8 34 Table 8 7 Download from GAAPE less p anda ae ha ee ddan 8 42 Table 11 1 Parameter Status Descriptions liliis 11 46 Table 11 2 Save History Data to File 0 0 uaaa 11 59 Table 11 3 Generate a Relay File 0000 aaa 11 64 Table 12 1 GAAPE Subdirectories a vesc xe xaO Re tege SOR eto LA 12 1 Table 12 2 Project Files aede er
205. into other areas of CAAPE such as the hardware or message editing grids that accept Clipboard data in text format Text based variable names can also be copied from hardware or message editing grids as well as other sources into the logic Text names pasted onto an empty space in the logic view causes Boolean equations to be inserted using those names as results Text names pasted onto an equation branch are inserted as equation variables 7 5 13 Opening the Variable List Dialog Open the Variable List dialog by going to View Variable List in the main menu Variables in the variable List can be dragged and dropped or copied and pasted into the logic view or into equations See Section 7 7 Using the Variable List Dialog for more details 7 5 14 Printing The Logic Set up print options by selecting File Page Setup in the main menu Preview printing with File Print Preview start printing with File Print P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 45 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 6 EDITING LINK PROTOCOL COMPONENTS Open the component and enter its data Press F1 for context sensitive help The following sample shows an editing screen for the DT8 protocol WP DTS Queens1 DT8 Quiet Poll Interval ms 100 Expedite Mode Message Timeout ms 100 T Multi Drop Flag CTS Flag RTS to CTS Delay 0 Forever fms o RTS Invert Flag CTS Invert Flag Tia tS mit fio AD AE Poll AE Timeout ms fo v Output Buffer
206. ion files 11 40 Publications related 2 3 R REDP 2 5 3 6 7 58 8 44 8 49 11 20 11 64 Requirements REDP 3 6 system 3 5 S Scripts 11 60 Serial number 4 1 Simulation logic 13 16 Simulator files 12 14 Snapshots 11 63 Switches 11 49 Symbols 6 1 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 V Variable 6 1 list 7 47 types 13 16 W Watch window 11 56 Wildcards 6 4 7 42 Alstom Signaling Inc Need help Contact Customer Service Alstom Signaling Inc 1025 John Street West Henrietta NY 14586 USA 1 800 717 4477 www alstomsignalingsolutions com a E ALSTOM
207. ion name U49 Created by compile Usage EPROM programming CSEX1 System Files application name U37 application name U50 Created by copied from installed files and split by compiler Usage EPROM programming CSEX2 Application System Files application name U36 application name U37 Created by compiler Usage EPROM programming CSEX3 Application System Files application name ODD application name EVN Created by compiler Usage EPROM programming 8 11 1 9 CenTraCode ll s CenTraCode Il s CPU Hex Files Files application name U54 system name U61 Created by CTC2 s Compile Usage EPROM programming P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 41 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 11 2 EPROM Programming All files are Intel Hex ASCII format File extensions should match chip designations on the board 8 11 3 Download To start a download from CAAPE follow the procedure in Table 8 7 Table 8 7 Download from CAAPE Step Procedure 1 Select a downloadable application 2 In the Main Menu select Actions Utilities 3 Click Download on the main toolbar 4 Right click on the application folder and select Download from the popup menu The Download Utility is launched and the application and system files are loaded and ready for download Selecting Download with anything else selected just launches the Download Utility without loading any files If the Download Utility fails to update the software
208. ion report CFC dates and times of input and output files etc Updated when EPROM files are created to include high low address file checksums and CRCs 8 8 4 1 EPROM Files The compile process produces application system files to be used in programming the memory devices on the boards Comm application and system files can be downloaded to the board or split into high low address EPROM files for direct memory device programming The individual EPROM files are created and shown in the application s Output Folder File checksums and CRCs are reported in the CAAPE s Message Workspace and output to the configuration report CFC file in the Report folder See Section 8 11 Programming Memory Devices for details P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 27 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 8 5 CTC2v CTC2s NVSP CSEX4 Applications Inputs include e Application source files CSI HDW created by the user e System software protocol data logging and other software modules depending on user selections in the source files From the CAAPE s CTCFILES directory LPC files for serial port and TWC NVTWC configuration Created by the user or defaults from CTCFILES Output folder files include e Application data structures CSE created if the Generate PROM file run control is selected They are split into individual high low address EPROM files for programming memory devices e Graphical Simulator data file SMN
209. ision Date Description of Change Author Checker Approver 0 A March 2006 Original issue MS JM NI 1 B ree Added CPU II board MS JM NI 2 C May 2008 oca to add WIU and MS JM NI Updated to add new iVPI 3 D dort boards CSEX4 VPICAA MS JM NI 010 Januar Updated to add new iVPI ME 2013 detail ES KN M November Updated to include P 2013 FSSVT clarification SG KIN MS G February Added Section 4 5 SG KW MS 2014 H August Updated warnings SG KW MS 2014 Added a new Section 1 added revised warnings April 2015 new Section 5 5 SG KW MS removed reference to WIU Updated warnings August updated Tracker y 2015 references obsolete e BN NG updated Section 9 2 2 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 Alstom Signaling Inc ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual contains the basic information needed to understand how to use Alstom s Computer Aided Application Programming Environment software package referred to as either CAAPE or the CAAPE The information in this manual is arranged into sections The title and a brief description of each section follow Section 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section contains safety precautions applicable to CAAPE Section 2 GENERAL This section gives general information on manual intent content and conventions Section 3 INTRODUCTION This section introduces the features of CAAPE and describes system requirements Section 4 GETTING STARTED This section describes the basics o
210. ist Check Include References when the selected files have INCLUDE records that name other files that will also be imported this is usually the case CAAPE reads the main import file identifies the files named in its INCLUDE records and imports those files as well Use this option most times since all the source files are needed to compile Check Keep Filenames to import files with their original names otherwise the CAAPE tries to assign new names to the files when they are imported Having CAAPE assign names is generally not very useful It is best to use existing file names and if necessary rename the files later The application folder and its Output and Report sub folders are created and the specified files are copied into the project s directory and added to the application Additional input files can be added or imported Existing Output and Report files can be imported into their respective folders as well P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 7 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 4 4 Upgrading VPI Applications to VPI2 To upgrade an existing VPI CPU PD application to VPI2 CPU 2 right click on the application in FileView and select Upgrade to VPI2 from the popup menu Output and report files are removed as they are no longer applicable to the CPU II board archive them before doing the upgrade if they must be preserved 8 4 5 Adding Files into Applications Add a new file to an application by right clicking on the applic
211. it executes the application Formats SKIP var name SKIP amp stmt num where var name is the name of a result of the equation on which to set the skip stmt num is the hexadecimal statement number of the statement on which to set the skip Examples SKIP LAMP OUT2 SKIP amp 1F4 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 49 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference SNAP SNAPD GET Creates or loads a simulation snapshot file which captures the current simulation state of all applications Formats SNAP snapshot file save snapshot file only if file does not already exist SNAPD snapshot file save snapshot file overwrite existing file if it already exists GET snapshot file read snapshot file and set simulation states to its contents where snapshot file is the name of the snapshot file to be created or read A standard extension of VSS is added Examples SNAPD SAVETEST GET SAVETEST TIME Changes the time delay of a timer in the current application Typically used to change the delay of a timer equation Format TIME var name mm ss where var name is the name of the timer variable usually the result of a timer equation mm is the new time delay minutes value Ss is the new time delay seconds value Example TIME LONG DELAY 2 45 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 50 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference TRACE Sets conditions for tracing displaying the status of statements as they execute in the logic of the current appli
212. ity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any designs or for the safe performance of the train control system P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 3 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Change Process UNIQUE SYSTEM ID CONTROL MUST BE MAINTAINED Failure to properly assign maintain and control a unique System ID for each VPI system within the entire train control system can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment Alstom strongly recommends that strict control of the System IDs be maintained so that the expected configuration of all VPls within the entire train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control systems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the sy
213. kpoints and changepoints A breakpoint can be set at a selected logic statement to stop simulation whenever that statement is executed A changepoints is a conditional breakpoint simulation stops when the statement is executed if its result variables have changed Options MSF YARD Break Points Monitors Equation Skips Simulation Relay File New By Result 11 5RC AA ox Break Point Change Point Y Y Y Y Remove Remove All Figure 11 6 Simulator Options Break Points P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 16 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator Select equations by number or result name and click Add Breakpoints and changepoints can also be set through the application s Ladder Logic View Use Remove and Remove All to remove selected breakpoint and changepoint equations from the list Use the Monitors tab to set monitors Monitors can be used to select particular equations to be listed in the Message Window as the simulator cycles Options MSF YARD Break Points Monitors Equation Skips Simulation Relay File Monitor Selection By Resut v 11 5RC Remove Figure 11 7 Simulator Options Monitors Select equations by number or result name and click Add Use Remove and Remove All to remove selected monitors from the list P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 17 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator Use the Skips tab to s
214. le 12LDO OUTPUTS 1 OUT1 LDO FLASH OUT1 FLASH HOT LO CK OUT1 HCK 1 OUT2 LDO FLASH OUT2 FLASH HOT LO CK OUT2 HCK P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 12 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 8 Messages Section This section defines messages This section can be fairly complex only the basics are described here The subsection format is MESSAGES message message2 The message format is typename length linkinfo bit1 bitname1 bit2 bitname2 e typename is the message type e length is the message length e linkinfo is type specific and specifies message options bitis the message bit number e bitname is the bit s variable name P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 13 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference Table 13 2 Message Types Type Name Description Link Info VPICSEX CSEX VPI to CSEX CSEX end CSEX name VPICSEX VPI VPI to CSEX CPU PD CSEX name end CSEXVPI CSEX CSEX to VPI CSEX end CSEX name CSEXVPI VPI CSEX to VPI CPU PD CSEX name end ATP IN ATP Input VSC link MVSL link ID VSC name ATP OUT ATP Output VSC link MVSL VSC name link ID CRG IN CRG Input CRG CRG name CRG OUT CRG Output CRG CRG name NV SERIAL IN Non vital Serial Control UNLATCHED port address num address bits CSEX name NV SERIAL OUT Non vital Serial Indication port address num address bits CSEX name NV SER
215. lected cell text is displayed in reverse video selected cells have a dark border Right clicking over selected cells displays a popup menu that can be used for e Cut Copy and Paste of grid data Grid data that was copied into the Clipboard can be pasted into the same or another grid or into a ladder logic component Find and Replace of grid data e Displaying of a list of the graphical components that use a selected variable Drag and Drop of grid cells is supported in CAAPE 005K and later 7 3 7 Opening the Variable List Dialog Variable names can be entered into grids through the Variable List dialog Click on View Variable List in the main menu to open the dialog See Section 7 7 Using the Variable List Dialog for details on the Variable List P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 15 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 8 Using the Find Replace Dialog This dialog can be used to search for and replace names in the grid When a search is performed the status bar indicates search results and if text is found its row and column header buttons are depressed To display the dialog go to Hardware Find in the main menu or right click on the grid and select Find from its popup menu Find what 105TP m Find Next Replace With EUEN Replace Options r Direction Scope Replace All Whole Word Only C Reverse Column Only Enable wildcards Forward C Row Only Close Match Case Entire
216. lent to the combination of the REVISION ID and SITE ID The SYSTEM ID board can be configured with the compiled SYSTEM ID value For iVPI refer to the application cfg file for the SYSTEM ID The SYSTEM ID is equivalent to the combination of the REVISION ID and SITE ID The SYSTEM ID board can be configured with the compiled SYSTEM ID value VRD will not energize if the REVISION ID SITE ID SYSTEM ID values configured on the hardware do not match the values configured in the application For VPI Il refer to the application cfn file for the Software Revision ID in order to update the High Low switch settings on the CSEX4 board The CSEXA application will not operate if the Revision ID values configured on the CSEX4 hardware do not match the values configured in the CSEX4 application For iVPI refer to the application cfn file for the Software Revision ID in order to update the High Low switch settings on the NVSP board The NVSP application will not operate if the Revision ID values configured on the NVSP hardware do not match the values configured in the NVSP application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 6 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Change Process 7 Testing the changes ensuring that the changes that were made did not affect other areas of the application FSSVT MODIFICATIONS MUST BE FIELD TESTED All changes made to the FSSVT must be field tested to validate the intended timer values of any modified timers are observed to
217. lers 2 000000 cece eens 13 26 13 5 3 TWC NVTWC Event Handlers 0000 lel 13 28 13 5 4 Sample Event Handler 00 00 ccc cence 13 30 13 6 Script File Formatieren duni ql de Dese xb mi KAG PADAPA 13 31 13 6 1 General Format 0 4 bs e or ER RO EON CERCA AS 13 31 13 6 2 Special Considerations for Interactive Execution 13 31 13 6 3 Project Application Commands 0 len 13 32 13 6 4 Alphabetic List of Commands a 13 33 13 6 5 Command Summary Project Level 13 53 13 606 Command Summary Application Level 13 55 13 6 7 Special Hardware Input Input Message Variable Considerations 13 59 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 xi Alstom Signaling Inc Figure No Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Figure 7 19 Figure 7 20 Figure 7 21 Figure 7 22 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 xii LIST OF FIGURES Title Page Main CAAPE Window 2 22 0c eee eee eee 4 3 Main CAAPE Window with Open Project aa 4 5 User Preferences kx aes eee dirus oU dudes ALAN RB de uS 4 6 ProjectView Workspace aaa ows i rund
218. lists of more than one subroutine declaration This is because a subroutine argument exists only within the scope of the subroutine that contains it For example declaring two subroutines with argument X as shown below is allowed because there are really two X variables the SUBRT1 argument variable and the SUBRT2 argument variable The subroutine format is SUBROUTINE SUBRT1 BOOL X END SUBRT1 SUBROUTINE SUBRT2 BOOL X INT Y END SUBRT2 6 2 4 Arrays Arrays of internal variables can be declared in non vital applications Array elements can be used in equations and also in output ports and outgoing message bits 6 2 5 PERMONE PERMZERO PERMONE indicates a Boolean value that is always True and PERMZERO a value that is always False PERMONE and PERMZERO can be used in place of variable names in some cases such as message bits or I O ports the rules governing where they can be used depend on the application 6 2 6 Symbol Table Each CAAPE project maintains a master list of all the symbol names used throughout the project The user can access this master list of names in graphical editing to find already entered names P2512A Rev J Aug 15 6 3 Alstom Signaling Inc General Rules and Techniques 6 3 O WIRING In general I O boards have a number of input or output ports that may be arranged in groups Groups have common wiring to provide energy to their ports Group data must be entered when data for any port in the group
219. ll the files for that application Source files are displayed directly in the application folder output and report files are displayed in subfolders The folders shown in the FileView are not actual directory folders on the PC They are virtual folders used to organize the files in the CAAPE s display There can also be a hierarchy of source files within the application where a main source file includes or references lower level files This hierarchy is not shown in the CAAPE display The main source file VPC extension for Vital CSI extension for non vital usually contains general documentation data and uses INCLUDE records to refer to other input files containing hardware logic etc e Serial port files may refer to protocol configuration data using a CONFIGURATION FILE record Protocol configuration files are not readable text and must be created using special editing tools contained in the CAAPE s graphics e Vital or non vital logic may use VPI Library Files to access libraries of reusable logic routines P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 1 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 2 CAA PACKAGES Each application uses a selected CAA Package to do the compiling and other low level operations CAA packages are collections of tools including the Vital and non vital compilers application data verifiers and various other utilities They are identified by version numbers such as 023N or 031A New CAA packages may be released to
220. lly enter the desired directory path or click the browse button and browse to the desired directory Name is the user name of the project When all data is entered click the Next button to go to the next window The Import Project page allows the data to be copied from an existing project into the new one P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 6 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects Import Project Import You can Import a Project and all its associated files from here This can help give you a head start by using a similar Project and modifying the contents as needed Project ca Keep filenames maintains the source Project s file names If not set the file names will be modified to the new Project s name Note conflicts can occur when not keeping filenames for projects with applications that require unique file names Keep filenames c Back Cancel Figure 5 5 Project Wizard Import Project Enter the source project cpb file s path or click the browse button and browse to the source file When importing a project selecting Keep Filenames ensures that the original file names in the source project are kept when the files are copied to the new project Leave the import path blank if no project data is imported When all data is entered click the Finish button The project s Name and Location are combined to create a new project directory and a new project file For example suppose that the Locati
221. ly edited and retrieved by the Vital or non vital compiler Each library member has e A unique identifying name to be used when accessing the member e Amember type VPI or CSEX which determines what kind of logic statements it can use e Optional descriptive records providing the creation and revision history of the member e A set of application logic statements with optional generic names for some or all of the variables Using a library member in application logic consists of naming the library file and the library member to be used and identifying the actual variable names to be substituted for the generic ones The library member s logic statements are extracted from the library file the actual variable names are substituted for the generic ones and the statements are inserted into the application logic P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 9 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files Consider a library member X in library file LIBFILE consisting of one statement BOOL DIR READY DIR UNLOCK PL where DIR is the generic text name to be substituted Putting LIBR LIBFILE X EAST in the application logic causes the compiler to get member X from the library file and substitute the text EAST for DIR wherever it is found in X s statements The statement BOOL EAST READY EAST UNLOCK PL is inserted into the logic Library files contain binary data that cannot be viewed by a text editor CAAPE provides
222. m Operation and Maintenance Manuals Volumes 1 5 P2511G VPI II Vital Processor Interlocking Control System Product Overview Manual P2512B AlsDload User Manual P2512C CenTraCode ll s CAA Reference Manual P2512D Vital Processor Interlocking VPI9 Computer Aided Application CAA Reference Manual P2512bE DataLogger User Manual P2512F Integrated Vital Processor Interlocking iVPI Computer Aided Application CAA Reference Manual P2521A iVPI Integrated Vital Processor Interlocking Control System Product Overview P2521B iVPI Integrated Vital Processor Interlocking Control System Operation and Maintenance Manuals Volumes 1 5 P2346 series Manuals for specific serial protocols P2512A Rev J Aug 15 2 7 Alstom Signaling Inc General THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK P2512A Rev J Aug 15 2 8 Alstom Signaling Inc Introduction SECTION 3 INTRODUCTION 3 1 WHAT IS CAAPE CAAPE the Computer Aided Application Programming Environment is an integrated software package for developing VPI9 and CenTraCode II s applications Data entry data editing compiling simulation application data verification download and other functions are performed through a single project oriented interface Applications can be imported from existing projects or built from scratch CAAPE manages the input data and the output and report files for an entire project and displays them in a hierarchical format 3 2 THEORY O
223. ments on the same or different branches Multiple equation results In some cases multiple items can also be selected by rubber banding press the left mouse button down move the mouse until the displayed rectangle completely surrounds the desired items then release the button These items can be selected by rubber banding Multiple consecutive statements Multiple consecutive parallel branches Multiple consecutive logic elements on a single branch Multiple equation results P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 31 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 3 5 Using Popups A context sensitive popup menu can be obtained by e Right clicking over an item if the right click is done over one of several selected items then the popup menu is for all the selected items and not just for the single item where the click occurred e Moving the caret over the item and pressing F2 e Going to the Edit Popup menu item 7 5 3 6 Opening Logic Items An item with editable contents can be opened for editing by e Double left clicking over the item e Moving the caret over it and pressing Enter or using the Edit Open main menu item When opening a Boolean equation the double click or caret position must be over its title bar the optional equation comment or the result symbol or result name list 7 5 3 7 Using Undo The last several editing operations are saved on an undo stack and can be undone one at a time using the Edit Und
224. mment followed by a simple Boolean equation Ladder Logic equation symbols are used The shaded boxes are the statement headers Note that the header for the Boolean equation gives a statement number and a statement type The color of the comment s header is different from that of the equation s header The colors of the headers of various statement types can be set as CAAPE user preferences WP CTC2Logic Queens1 NV Figure 7 14 Logic Editing View P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 26 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 1 Overview of Statement Types 7 5 1 1 Boolean Equations Boolean equations combine Boolean True or False input values to produce one or more results They can be considered roughly comparable to circuits in which combinations of open or closed relay contacts energize or de energize relay coils However in Boolean equations the input and result values may represent message bits or internal variables as well as physical inputs and outputs In the following discussion the term parameters refers to the values that are combined to get a result The input data for Boolean equations is read from the parameters and combined using AND OR and NOT operations The resulting True or False value is stored in one or more results The results are displayed as a relay coil with the result names below it The input data in the equation is displayed as horizontal lines called branches A series of consecutive elements on a
225. n at the same time Each individual board in the module can only have one open editing view at a time if a request is made to open a board and its editing screen is already open the screen is brought to the top The following is a sample editing screen for a VPI Direct Input DI board Notice that a grid control is used to enter its input port data See Section 7 4 2 Using the Grid Control for how to use grids Board Type Part Number Part Number 5 166 029 32 Cancel 31166 029 27 31166 029 28 31156 023 23 31156 023 30 31166 029 31 31166 029 32 Description CPU PD w 40025 366 Sw Figure 7 8 Sample Hardware Board Edit Enter the board data With an editing screen open press the F1 key to get context sensitive online help describing the data to be entered When done click the editing window s X close button to close the screen P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 14 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 6 Using the Grid Control Some types of data such as wire and I O names are edited through grid controls Use the arrow keys to navigate the grid or click on the desired cell to make it active The row and column header cells indicate the current active cell Cells can be selected by Using an arrow key to make the cell active e Clicking on the row or column header cell to select the entire row or column e Shift clicking to select a range of cells e Dragging the mouse cursor over a range of cells Se
226. n control system P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 7 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions ACCURATE SOFTWARE REVISION ID CONTROL MUST BE MAINTAINED Failure to update and maintain the Software Revision IDs for every software change made to the application data and or system software even a re compile done with no software changes jeopardizes proper software revision control and can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment Alstom strongly recommends that Software Revision IDs be changed with every software change even a re compile of unchanged software Software Revision IDs shall be maintained so that software and application revision control is maintained and the expected configuration of all VPIs in the train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control systems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authori
227. n each CAA package do the actual work of compiling and data verification The signaling engineer selects a particular CAA package based on what version of system software is needed The versions of CAAPE and its underlying CAA packages are identified by Alstom part numbers For example CAAPE version 31754 005 rev M often abbreviated as CAAPE 005M is shipped with these CAA packages e VPI CAA 31746 023 rev T 023T for generating VPI application data compatible with the 40026 191 Vital VPI system software that was shipped with OS 2 based CAA packages e VPI CAA 31746 032 rev E 032E for generating VPI application data compatible with Vital VPI system software 40025 366 e CenTraCode ll s CAA 31751 014 rev L 014L for generating CenTraCode Il s application data CAAPE hides the details of selecting and launching the low level CAA programs from the signaling engineer who only has to select a compiler version and request an operation such as Compile By selecting a compiler version for an application the signaling engineer is actually selecting a CAA package i e telling CAAPE which set of low level programs to use to compile and verify that application After installation of CAA packages the CAA group number will reflect the CAAPE group number Customers are assigned a group number that is part of the CAAPE install For example CAA 31746 xxx 02 becomes 31746 xxx 10 after installation with CAAPE 31754 yyy 10 P251
228. n from its popup menu The New Application dialog is displayed Path C AlstomPrograms Caape Apps vpil4b Name NSVital ES CenTraCode2 y Application CSI CenTraCode2 s Application CSI Cancel Figure 8 1 New Application Dialog Enter the name and type of the new application An application folder is created containing Output and Report sub folders and a template for the main input file The main input file can be edited and additional input files added or imported P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 5 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 4 3 Importing Applications Import an application when the main input file and some or all of the other input files already exist Right click a system folder and select Import Application from its popup menu The Import dialog is displayed r Add files to Project Directory Co BNCDefault C3 BNCK30 Cancel sy Bruno 5 Bunteyn a 5 Bunteyn aE Ran Qj Bunteyn pre Application vpc csi pg File List C SAlstomProgramssCaapeNAppsNXBrunoNSh06431 C51 lt lt Add C SAlstomProgramssCaapesA amp ppsNBrunoNSh0B431 V PC Cancel FF A Keep filenames Include references Figure 8 2 Import Applications Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 6 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files Select the main application files to be imported and click Add to add them to the import l
229. n is started from a CAAPE project the selected applications are automatically added to a simulator project in the same directory as the CAAPE project If applications from multiple CAAPE projects must be simulated together some of them have to be added manually To manually add an application to a simulator project open the project file and use Project Add Application in the main menu Alternately right click on the Applications folder in the Project Contents window and select Add Application from its popup menu Browse to the application data file and click OK The application is added to the project The application and its contents are added to the Applications folder in the Project Contents Window and a new window is opened for it in the Message Window If an application of the same name already exists in the project the simulator program assigns a unique temporary name An application can be renamed by selecting the application in the Project Contents Window and then clicking on it a second time All applications in a project must have a unique name 11 7 5 Removing an Application To remove an application go to Remove in the application s popup menu The application item is removed from the project All displays and settings associated with this application are removed from the project as well P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 8 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 7 6 Importing Data from Another Project To import d
230. n slot 7 and that it is CSEXn board 1 in the system Records such as CSEX ID or CSEX PROGRAM NUMBER use this number to match their data to specific boards in the hardware In the Settings dialog select the Board Number from the hardware file for the board that is configured by this application For CenTraCode Il v applications select the Board Type for this board as well P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 15 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 7 2 Run Controls These are used to select the compiler version CAA package and set application specific options for compile data verification and other operations Left click on an application or its main source file to select it then go to Options Run Controls in the main menu The Run Controls dialog is displayed Enter run control options and click OK Project Run Controls General vPI ADV Compare Use Run Controls Record v Compile Generate Tracker Information v Generate PROM File V Generate GraphSim Information Hardware Only IV Include in MMS File m Listing reports v List All Board Parameters FU Sums T Board Edge T Wire Index Logic Equations Gross Reference m Compiler revision Rev 613 DK Cancel Apply Figure 8 6 VSP CPU2 Main Run Controls accessible from ProjectView or FileView P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 16 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files Figure 8 7 VSP CPU2 Comm Run Controls ac
231. nc Using CAAPE Graphics Vital Serial link and block numbers must be set for Vital Serial boards and VSoE messages in a VPI or iVPI system Go to Hardware VSC Links in the main menu to open a dialog for setting link properties VITAL COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRE UNIQUE LINK AND BLOCK SETTINGS Failure to properly assign maintain and control unique Link and Block settings for Vital communications within VPI systems can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment The message link and block values must be assigned such that the combination of these values is unique throughout the network Alstom strongly recommends that strict control of the Link and Block settings be maintained so that the expected configuration of all VPIs in the train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control systems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transit
232. nd non vital text simulators and by Graphical Simulator VCK Relay Equivalent Circuit file for a single application Created by Vital and non vital text simulators and by Graphical Simulator This file is transferred to Intergraph CAD to be processed into graphics files depicting the equivalent relay circuits for the Boolean equations VLG Simulator log file for a single application Created by the Vital and non vital simulators and by Graphical Simulator Contains a record of all commands and messages VSQ Simulation logic file Used by vital and non vital text simulators and by Graphical Simulator Supplemental logic statements written to support simulation only P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 14 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference SECTION 13 SIMULATOR REFERENCE 13 1 ABOUT THIS SECTION This section details information on certain aspects of the Graphical Simulator It includes the following APPLICATION DATA FILE FORMAT which describes the format of the file that provides simulation data for an application The file is normally created by one of the compiler programs in a CAA but could be created using a text editor for special purposes This is an advanced topic SIMULATION LOGIC FILE FORMAT which describes the format of Simulation Logic files which can be appended to the normal logic of an application in order to simulate error conditions or the behavior of field devices e PRED
233. nfiguration data for the application using information returned from CAA programs Not editable by the user appname CFG Vital configuration report file saved as a Report file in the application appname CFN Non vital configuration report file saved as a Report file in the application appname CFC Comm configuration report file saved as a Report file in the application appname CRV Vital Compiler Report Stores compile information for use in generating MMS information file appname CRN Non vital Compiler Report Stores compile information for use in generating MMS information file appname CRC Comm Compiler Report Stores compile information for use in generating MMS Information file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 4 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure 12 6 0 VPI and iVPI CAA Files See the appropriate CAA Reference Manual for more details on these files Table 12 5 Compiler Input Files File Description NPC Main Vital input file Contains INCLUDE statements for other input data files listed below Used by Vital compiler VCC Comm main input file Contains INCLUDE statements for other input data files listed below Used by VPI Comm compiler CSI Main non vital input file Contains INCLUDE statements for other input data files listed below Used by non vital compiler HDW Hardware definition file Named in VPC and CSI file
234. nge Process UNIQUE SITE ID CONTROL MUST BE MAINTAINED Failure to properly assign maintain and control unique Site IDs for VPI systems can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment Alstom strongly recommends that strict control of the Site IDs be maintained so that the expected configuration of all VPIs in the train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control systems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any designs or for the safe performance of the train control system P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 2 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Change Process ACCURATE SOFTWARE REVISION ID
235. nks can be created between hardware outputs and inputs in different applications so that as the simulator cycle s output data is automatically transferred from the outputs to their linked inputs To link outputs to inputs go to Setup Links in the main menu The I O Links dialog appears xi Source Application Destination Application MSF_YARDCSx1 MsF YARD 1 Slot 2 NYO E Slot 14 DI 1 TIARKW NVO 2 VIARKR NVO 2 YARWP DI 3 T3ARKW NVO 3 Y2NWP DI 4 134RKR NVO z 4 Y2RWP DI Add Link 2 2 1 114RKW NVO 1 14 1 YINWP DI Enabled Enable Remove Link Remove All Figure 11 5 I O Links Dialog Select a source and a destination application Available I O ports are displayed Select an input and an output port and then click Add Link The link is added to the Links list at the bottom When the simulator runs the state of the output is automatically transferred to the linked input P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 15 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 3 Editing Simulator Options The Simulator Options dialog can be opened for an application by Going to Setup Simulator options in the main menu If there is more than one application in the project select one of them e Right clicking one of the applications in the Applications folder of the Project Contents window and selecting Simulator Options from its popup menu Use the dialog s Break Points tab to set brea
236. ns data Created by non vital compiler LINK PRM Temporary application data file Created by non vital compiler used by non vital linker ACP Temporary files used to pass build status and configuration data PG from CAA programs back to CAAPE P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 13 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure 12 6 4 Simulator Files Text simulation is always on a per application basis and the text simulator programs belong to the VPI and CenTraCode II s programs Graphical Simulator is a separate program capable of simulating multiple applications File Table 12 15 Simulator Files Description SPJ Graphical Simulator project file No comparable file for text simulators SMV Graphical Simulator simulation data file One per application produced by Vital compiler used by Graphical Simulator No comparable file for text simulators SMN Graphical Simulator simulation data file One per application produced by non vital compiler used by Graphical Simulator No comparable file for text simulators VSC Simulator command file Used by Vital and non vital text simulators and by Graphical Simulator Can be created by text editor or by simulator For text simulators must be fixed record length of 80 no restrictions for Graphical Simulator Graphical Simulator file may contain commands for multiple applications VSS Simulator snapshot file Created and used by Vital a
237. nted statements are still visible on the logic screen but are grayed If the logic is exported to a text file these statements are written as comments and are therefore not compiled into executable code The Uncomment popup menu item can be used to make commented statements active again 7 5 9 Using Find Replace and Go To Use the Edit Find Edit Replace or Edit Go to Statement main menu items to display a dialog to use for finding and replacing text strings in the logic or going to statements that meet specified criteria The Find and Replace dialog is modeless and is displayed until dismissed by the user The Find tab is used to find text P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 41 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics x Find Replace Go To Find What Find Next Less Cancel Search For Search In T Whole Words Only o e E Deas Use Wildcards C AllNames C Entire C Results Only C Selected C Text Only m Name Filtering Usage All Figure 7 18 Logic Find and Replace Dialog Find Use Wildcards allows accept any combination of characters and accept any single character wildcards to be used The Less button can be clicked to hide the search options and reduce the size of the dialog Find and Replace x Find Replace Go To Find What Find Next Cancel Figure 7 19 Logic Find and Replace Dialog Find Reduced Size Note that the button
238. ntrol is selected Read by the Graphical Simulator to simulate the application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 23 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files Report folder files include Compiler report L VC depending on run controls may include listings of the application logic information on hardware module wiring lists of variables and their usages etc e Configuration report CFG may include versions of graphical components used to create the text source files dates and times of input and output files etc Updated when EPROM files are created to include high low address file checksums and CRCs e ADV data file LADV created if the Generate ADV Information run control is selected Read by the Application Data Verifier to link variable names to variable locations so the ADV can output readable names in its report e Consolidation Report file VCR summary of application data created to be compared to a similar file LACR which is created by the ADV e Tracker file CAS Reserved for Alstom use only e Label files HPS SFS created if the I O Label Information run control is selected Plotter files for creating front cover labels for the VPI modules See Section 8 8 6 Creating VPI Labels 8 8 2 1 EPROM Files The compile process produces application system files to be used in programming the memory devices on the boards CPU application and system files can be downloaded to the board or split into high low
239. ntroller a unique identification in the network of DigiSAFE communications Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment DIGISAFE COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRE UNIQUE NETWORK IDS The DigiSAFE iVPI IDs and the zone controller IDs must be assigned such that the values are unique to each other and to any other ID throughout the entire DigiSAFE network Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment INTENDED SAFE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE VPI SYSTEM MUST BE VERIFIED The safety of the application logic as written is the responsibility of an experienced signaling engineer CAAPE does not make any determination regarding the inherent safety of the logic equations that were entered Verifying the accuracy with which CAAPE converted the experienced signaling engineer s application data into PROM data structures is aided by CAAPE but the signaling engineer must make a final determination using information supplied by CAAPE CAAPE s compilers are not themselves Vital programs An additional independent process is needed to verify that the compile was done correctly This process is required for all Vital applications An experienced signal engineer must verify the safety of the VPI data and its application It is the signaling engineer s re
240. nts available in that project Select the desired components in the Component Browser and click OK The selected components are copied to the target project s directory and added to the target project This is the preferred method of importing components Import Components from File CAAPE prompts for the actual component files Select the files and click OK This method is less preferable since it requires the user to be aware of the file extensions used for the various types of graphical components However it is a way to recover components if the original project file was somehow corrupted or lost 7 10 2 Importing Systems Right click the top level project in the ProjectView and select Import Systems Browse to the source project file and use the System Browser to select the systems to import 7 10 3 Importing an Entire Project Right click the top level project in the ProjectView and select Import Project Browse to the source project file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 67 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 10 4 Creating Components from Text Files Hardware logic and LPC components can be created by importing application source text files Individual message components cannot be created from text files the correspondence between message components and files is too complicated Go to the appropriate component type folder in the ComponentView right click and select Import Components from Text Browse to the text file 7
241. o graphical format for examining and printing the equations 1 In CAAPE 005A or later run the application in the Graphical Simulator The logic is displayed in ladder logic format regardless of the way it was originally entered 2 In CAAPE 005C or later import the VTL or NV file into a CAAPE Ladder Logic component and print the logic from the component s editing window See Importing Components from Text for details 3 In CAAPE 005F or later open a Logic Print Window to create a printout of the logic 4 Use the Relay Equivalent Drawing Package REDP if it has been installed The third and fourth approaches are recommended where an independent double check of the graphical Make Files conversion process is desired The logic printout is created by a process that is independent of CAAPE s ladder logic editor so it provides a diverse check of the accuracy with which the ladder logic was converted to text 8 13 1 Graphical Simulator The Graphical Simulator is capable of displaying and printing logic graphically regardless of the way it was originally entered in the application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 44 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 13 2 Import Logic Files into CAAPE Logic Component The VTL or NV file can be imported into a ladder logic component to be edited or printed graphically This approach allows changes to be made graphically if desired the component could then be exported back to a text file altho
242. o main menu item There is one exception to this when data is moved using Drag and Drop the move actually consists of two operations which must be undone separately Undo the deletion from the source screen and also the insertion into the target screen if data is moved within the same set of logic the source and target screens are the same 7 5 3 8 Using Cut and Paste Single or multiple selected logic items can be cut or copied to the Clipboard then pasted to the same or a different set of ladder logic The target of a Paste operation is the logic item at the current caret location For example if an input variable is in the Clipboard the caret must be over a branch in a Boolean equation for a Paste operation to be allowed the pasted variable is inserted onto the branch at the caret location Items are available on the main Edit or popup menus for doing cut and paste The Cut and Copy menu items are available only if logic data is selected The Paste menu item is available only if Clipboard data is valid to be pasted into the current caret location P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 32 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 3 9 Using Drag and Drop Selected logic data can be dragged and dropped from one logic view into the same or a different one First select the data then press the left mouse button over one of the selected items Drag the mouse to the desired location and release the mouse button If the Ctrl key is held down the
243. oard e g to determine when an output flashes or pulses The bits in an input or output message The internal data used in logic equations e g Current Result or Self Latched in VPI 6 2 1 Symbol Naming Rules Symbols in CAAPE applications can be no longer than 16 characters in length They must not start with the character since this character is used in certain reserved internal names Symbols must not contain embedded blanks and they must not contain any characters that can be used as delimiters in a compiler input file For example a variable that is used in application logic should not contain or character since these characters represent the AND and OR operators in Boolean logic or are used as delimiters Two system reserved names have special meanings and must not be assigned as parameter names e PERMONE indicates values that are always True e PERMZERO indicates values that are always False Depending on the compiler certain variable names have predefined CAA usages or are generated by the compiler and are therefore reserved names Compilers that use VSOE2 generate LinkOk parameters for each VSOE link The names of these parameters are VSOENNN LINKOK where NNN will be the link number range 1 to 200 of the link they represent These names are reserved and cannot be used P2512A Rev J Aug 15 6 1 Alstom Signaling Inc General Rules and Techniques 6 2 2 Symbol Declar
244. oard Type Part Number Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 12 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Select a board type and part number and then click OK The new board is displayed in the slot A board can be copied or cut to the Clipboard and pasted into an empty slot in this or another hardware module Right click on the board and select Copy or Cut from the popup menu or select the board and use the main Edit menu Right click on an empty slot and select Paste Board from its popup menu The specifications stated for the boards from within the CAAPE GUI Description are for reference only to aid in board selection Actual design parameters should be obtained from the product manuals An NVSP board with a P3 Interface part number 31166 475 01 requires two slots Non Vital Input boards must be grouped together and not interleaved with Non Vital Output boards Likewise Non Vital Output boards must be grouped together and not interleaved with Non Vital Input boards P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 13 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 5 Editing Boards Right click on a board and select Open from its popup menu or double click on the board A board editing screen is displayed The format and contents of the screen depends on the type of board being edited The title of an open board s editing screen indicates the board type its module and slot and the name of the parent hardware component Multiple boards can be ope
245. of adding a component or using an existing LPC file CSEX NVSP and CenTraCode ll s CPU boards may require an LPC component for serial port communications Open the board go to the desired Serial Port tab and go to the Configuration section on that tab Click the Config Data button to add a protocol component NVSP and CSEXA boards with networking may require an LPC component for network port communications Open the board go to the Network Ports tab select a network port number and go to the Configuration section on that tab Click the Config Data button to add a protocol component TWC and NVTWC boards may require an LPC component for train to wayside communications Open the board and go to the Configuration section Click the Config Data button to add a protocol component P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 55 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics In each case a dialog appears listing available components Select the desired component and click the Add button to add it to the board Create a new component directly from this dialog by clicking the New button rather than having to go back to the ComponentView each time The newly created component is not automatically added to the board it is still necessary to select it and click Add Figure 7 30 shows a Vital Serial Board editing view with component linking enabled fam SC 1 10 QueensiaA Bl x r Part Number 59473 939 10 _Board PN PN Ww 40025 322 SW ID Numbe
246. of certain hardware boards A graphical editing screen is opened in the Edit Workspace The format of the editing screen depends on the type of component being edited Once component data is entered select File Save in the main menu to save the data If multiple components are open File Save All saves them all Close the editing screen by selecting File Close from the main menu or click the x close button at the upper right of the window Descriptions of the editing process for the various component types are given in the following sections For instructions on using specific editing screens and dialogs use CAAPE s context sensitive help F1 key P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 6 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 EDITING HARDWARE COMPONENTS When a hardware component is created or opened for editing a hardware editing screen is displayed The specific contents of the screen vary depending on the type of hardware being edited but the general editing process involves e Setting general hardware properties e Adding one or more hardware modules and setting their properties e Adding boards to each module e Setting the properties of each board including the names of any I O variables 7 3 1 Setting General Hardware Properties These settings apply to all modules in the hardware Select Hardware Properties from the main menu Enter the required data in the Hardware Properties dialog As with all hardware editing scr
247. olbar The individual EPROM files are created and shown in the application s Output Folder File checksums and CRCs are reported in the CAAPE s Message Workspace and output to the configuration report CFG file in the Report folder See Section 8 11 Programming Memory Devices for details P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 22 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 8 2 VPI2 CPU2 Main Applications Main subsystem Inputs include e Application source files VPC HDW created by the user e CPU2 and VSC system software from the selected CAA version Output folder files include e Application data structures HEX created if the Generate PROM file run control is selected can be downloaded to the board or can be split into individual high low address EPROM files for programming application memory devices Also read by the Application Data Verifier to prove that application data was created correctly e System software HEX copied from the CAA package directory Can be downloaded to the board or can be split into high low address EPROM files for programming CPU Il system memory devices e High low address CPU EPROM files e Vital serial application data structures VB1 VB2 for programming the Vital serial boards CPU II only e Vital serial system software HEX can be used to program the Vital serial boards e Graphical Simulator data file SMV created if the Generate GraphSim Information run co
248. ols are provided by CAAPE Creating or importing a graphical system A graphical system represents a 3 VPI iVPI or CenTraCode Il s hardware system and contains the application programming needed to make it run at the customer location Linking the components into the system This process combines the graphical 4 M building blocks to describe the system 5 Performing a Make Files operation to create the textual application source data files for the compiler to process 6 Compiling the source files to produce the output and report data files 7 Optionally performing simulation to check whether the application logic is correct 8 Performing Application Data Verification to verify that the Vital application data generated by the compiler accurately reflects what the user entered 9 Programming the EPROM memory devices on the boards to install the application and system software P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 1 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Steps 1 through 4 can be performed in any order New components can be created at any point and editing does not have to be complete before a component can be linked into a system Changing an existing system involves all the above steps except for 3 since the graphical system is already created existing components are edited new ones are created and linked into the system a new Make Files is performed etc Once the application files have been created they are manipulated
249. on control on the first Documentation page contains e 1caapelapps and the Name control contains the text MyProject A new directory e caape apps MyProject is created and a CAAPE project file MyProject cpb is created and placed in that directory When a new project is created its Project Documentation Window is displayed in the Edit Workspace This window shows the project s location and any documentation data that was entered in the Project Wizard The project documentation can be changed by entering new data on this screen and then using File Save in the main menu or clicking the Save button on the main toolbar P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 7 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects Prroject Danvile o Project Location C SA stomProgramsNCaapesSppsNLen Mame Danville CPB Application Description CSX Danville upgrade existing installation to CPU PD CSEX3 amp Vital Diagnostic Protocol Designer Alstom Signaling Inc L Smith Checker Alstom Signaling Inc Copyright 2005 E Habaan 001 00 Figure 5 6 Project Documentation Window Close an open project by selecting File Close Project in the main menu or by closing the Project Documentation Window If changes have been made to project data and have not yet been saved CAAPE prompts for a response to save or discard the changes P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 8 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects 5 3 OPENING AN EXISTING
250. ondition NFBRK var name clear filament break condition where var name is the name of an output variable Examples FBRK 1GE LDO NFBRK 1GE LDO FFAIL FPASS Sets or clears a flash failure condition for the specified output in the current application Flash failure causes the flash checks to fail when the output is evaluated Formats FFAIL var name set flash fail condition FPASS var name clear flash fail condition where var name is the name of an output variable Examples FFAIL 1GE LDO FPASS 1GE LDO P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 38 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference FLIP Reverses the value of a variable in the current application if False sets it True if True sets it False Format FLIP var name where var name is the name of a variable Example FLIP 1HD DI FPASS See FFAIL GEN See RMARK GET See SNAP P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 39 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference HWINON HWINOFF HWINFLASH Sets the state of a hardware input Under some conditions this may be better than setting the input variable using TRUE or NTRUE because the variable value does not revert to the hardware input value when inputs are evaluated HWINFLASH allows the input to be simulated as flashing which is more difficult to do with TRUE or NTRUE commands or simulation logic Formats HWINON var name turn input ON HWINOFF var name turn input OFF HWINFLASH var name flash rate turn input FLASHING
251. onent has either the Source or the Destination column filled depending on whether the message it represents is received or transmitted P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 23 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics In Figure 7 13 the Destination column is filled and the variables are therefore used for an incoming Vital serial message imi VitalSerialdessage Queens VSL13 R Message Source Destination SC4_113RVVC SI SC4_121RVVC SI VSC4 E1TP SI SC4_C2TP Sl SC4_B3TP Sl VSC4 B4TP SI V5C4 11EAD SI V5C4 11EH SI SC4_11EBHB SI VSC4 12bAD SI VSC4 12EH SI SC4 12bEBHB SI Variable List Find Figure 7 13 Message Editing View 7 4 2 Using the Grid Control Grid controls are used to enter variable names See Section 7 3 6 Using the Grid Control for instructions on using grids The Variable List and Find Replace dialogs can be accessed with the Variable List and Find buttons on the message editing screen 7 4 3 Printing A simple text printout of the message component can be obtained by going to File Print on the main menu Grid elements are formatted based on the width of the print page to attempt to minimize the amount of paper that is used P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 24 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 EDITING LOGIC COMPONENTS Ladder logic is a graphical representation of the Vital or non vital logic in an application As with the older
252. ope cals Ba We ds EET 5 3 ComponentView Workspace cece ee eee ee eee 5 4 FileView Workspace sodass Die d PAX XR KG ME P RITE DE 5 5 Project Wizard Documentation eee eee 5 6 Project Wizard Import Project eese 5 7 Project Documentation Window llle 5 8 Project OPNONS corda KAPA BAKA tei iar NA NN 5 13 Add Component Dialog i m nne ER ERRRSRerE ANN 7 4 Hardware Properties Dialog aaa 7 7 Module Type Part Number Dialog eee eee 7 8 New Hardware Module eere 7 9 Hardware Module with Boards 0 000 7 10 Module Properties Screen eee eee eee 7 11 Board Type Part Number Dialog lisse 7 12 Sample Hardware Board Edit 022000005 7 14 Grid Find Replace Dialog 22 22 RR RE hs 7 16 VSP Board Network Dialog aaa 7 20 VSP Board DigiSafe Dialog lille 7 21 VSP CPU2 Board VSOE dialog a 7 22 Message Editing View sss ee Rr 7 24 Logic Editing View ote 2 RES EET d oe RP vsus 7 26 Ladder Logic Boolean Equation Display 7 28 Time Delay Equation Data 00000 7 34 Function Statement Properties aa 7 35 Logic Find and Replace Dialog Find 7 42 Logic Find and Replace Dialog Find Reduced Size 7 42 Logic Find and Replace Dialog Replace 7 43 Logic Find and Replace Dialog Go To 7
253. operties dialog or popup menu to set its horizontal vertical or diagonal orientation and assign its input variable It is important to assign the input variable immediately as this small segment may be copied multiple times to create a larger section of track If the variable is not assigned before this is done each copied segment must be assigned the variable separately e Click once on the segment to select it A small green handle is displayed Press the left mouse button over the segment and drag the mouse to the desired end position Depending on its orientation the segment is either stretched or copied to the end position 11 9 3 5 Copying Devices Individual elements can be copied between open track plans using Cut Copy and Paste clipboard operations P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 35 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 9 3 6 Removing Devices Selected devices can be removed by pressing the Delete key or by selecting Delete from their popup menu Cut can also be used to remove the device s from the screen and place them on the Windows Clipboard 11 9 3 7 Device Captions Captions are descriptive text that can be displayed with a device The text can be set in the device s Properties dialog The default font for caption text can be set for a given track plan by going to Track Plan Font in the main menu The default font can be overridden in the Properties dialog when the caption text is set A device
254. or certain types of boards Created in the CAAPE and added to its FileView Used automatically by the label programs no need to name in the VPC file NVI Logic Information file non vital Created by performing Make Files on a ladder logic component but can also be created manually Used by Graphical Logic Verification and when creating a ladder logic component from an NV file Used automatically if it is in the directory no need to name it in the CSI file VTI Logic Information file vital Created by performing Make Files on a ladder logic component but can also be created manually Used by Graphical Logic Verification and when creating a ladder logic component from a VTL file Used automatically if it is in the directory no need to name it in the VPC file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 6 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure Table 12 7 Report Files File Description ACR VPI ADV consolidation listing file Created by ADV ADO ADV output report log file Listing of the output from the ADV CMD window ADV ADV symbol table file Created by Vital compiler used by Application Data Verifier ADV CAD CAD annotation file Created by Vital compiler CAQ Reserved for Alstom use only CAS Reserved for Alstom use only CFC Comm configuration report Created by Comm compiler See also Application Configuration Files CFG Vital configuration rep
255. or edit the label annotation file by going to the I O Label Information section of the VPI application s run controls and clicking the Label Comments button A Label Annotations dialog is displayed Add the checksums or CRCs as comments for the appropriate boards Enable label file creation in the run controls go to the General tab of the run controls dialog and disable PROM generation Run the VPI Compiler New PROM files are not created so the PROM checksums and CRCs do not change Label files are created and in the process the CAAPE reads the comments from the annotation file and put them on the labels for the appropriate boards P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 30 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 9 SIMULATION Graphical Simulation is available for the CAA packages in CAAPE 005A and later earlier CAA packages used text based simulation on a per application basis 8 9 1 Graphical Simulation Graphical simulation requires that the application run control be set for the compiler to create a simulator data file SMV or SMN To start simulation from CAAPE go to the FileView and select a project system or application folder Go to Actions Simulate in the main menu or click the Simulate toolbar button simulation is only available if simulation data files are available for all selected applications The Graphical Simulator is launched and a simulation project is automatically created containing all selected applications
256. or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any designs or for the safe performance of the train control system P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 18 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 11 Printing A simple text printout of the entire hardware component can be obtained by going to File Print on the main menu 7 3 12 iVPI VSP Board and Zone Controller Certain Vital CAA s have support for the DigiSAFE protocol for Vital communications with Zone Controllers If one of these CAA s is installed the VSP board view will require some extra information therefore an additional tab will be displayed On the Network tab there is a DigiSafe section to enter the iVPI ID number that will be used in the communications with the Zone Controller It is a 16 bit unsigned number DIGISAFE COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRE UNIQUE VSP BOARD ID A unique ID must be assigned to each iVPI VSP board in order to give each iVPI a unique identification in the network of DigiSAFE communications Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 19 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Application Revision History Bo
257. ormat for general instructions on creating simulation logic file 13 5 1 Event Handler Functions These functions can be added by the user and are automatically called by the simulator when certain communication events occur They must be defined as subroutines and placed at the start of the simulation logic The function format is SUBROUTINE handler name parameter list logic statements END handler name e parameter list consists of a parameter type code followed by a variable name Subroutine and variable names must be exactly as defined below The types are BOOL a Boolean value BOOL a pointer to a Boolean return variable NT an Integer value INT a pointer to an Integer return variable STRING a String value P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 25 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 5 2 NV Serial Event Handlers ON NVSER RECV ENABLE INT PORT BOOL ENABLED Called when message receive on the serial port is enabled or disabled PORT is the port number from 1 to max ENABLED is True if enabled False if disabled ON NVSER XMIT ENABLE INT PORT BOOL ENABLED Called when message send on the serial port is enabled or disabled e PORT is the port number from 1 to max ENABLED is True if enabled False if disabled ON NVSER RECEIVING INT PORT STRING ADDRESS INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Called when a message is about to be received on the serial port PORT is th
258. ort In CAA versions prior to 25C created by Vital compiler See also Application Configuration Files CFN Non vital configuration report Created by non vital compiler See also Application Configuration Files CON Console report files status reports LCC Comm compiler listing file Created by Comm compiler LCS Non vital compiler listing file Lists symbol usages etc Created by non vital compiler LINK CTR Link instructions for non vital linker Created by non vital compiler LVC Vital compiler listing file Lists hardware wiring symbol usages etc Created by Vital compiler LRP Link report file Created by non vital linker LSV ADV listing file Created by ADV Used as input to ADV Comparison program SYM ADV Comparison report file Created by ADV Comparison program VCO Vital compiler report log file Listing of the output from the Vital compiler CMD window NCR Vital compiler consolidation listing file Created by Vital compiler Compare to ACR file created by ADV P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 7 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure Table 12 8 Output Files ASCII hex Format File Description HEX Prom code data file Created by Vital compiler read by ADV Can be split for PROM burning VBn Vital Serial PROM data file Created by Vital compiler one per Vital Serial board CSE CSEX PROM data file Created by non vital compiler For CAA versions 25C and later should not be u
259. over a single item to flip the True False value of a Boolean variable or change the numeric value of a non Boolean P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 56 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator Right click to obtain a popup menu Watch Window popup menu contents depend on the number and types of variables selected Available popup menu contents are Allow Docking Hide Find Logic Result When checked allows the Watch Window to be docked at top bottom or sides of the main window If not checked allows it to float anywhere on the screen Hide the Watch Window Go to View Watch Window in the main menu to show it again Open or activate the logic view for the selected item s application and search for an equation that uses the variable as a result Remove Removes the selected variable s from the Watch Window True Available if Boolean variables are selected and at least one of their values is False Sets the value of selected variable s to True False Available if Boolean variables are selected and at least one of their values is True Sets the value of selected variable s to False Set Value Available if a non Boolean numeric variable is selected Displays a dialog for changing the value of the variable Float in Main If checked forces the Watch Window to float within the main Window window P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 57 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11
260. ows NT4 SP6A 2000 XP RAM 128 MB P2512A Rev J Aug 15 3 6 Alstom Signaling Inc Getting Started SECTION 4 GETTING STARTED 4 1 INTRODUCTION This section describes how to install CAAPE how to start and exit the program and how to set basic user preferences It provides a top level description of CAAPE s user interface 4 2 PREPARING TO INSTALL CAAPE 4 2 1 Installation Serial Number It is necessary to have the installation serial number that identifies a registered CAAPE user before performing the installation The serial number is provided separately from the installation CD ROM package The serial number must be used whenever performing an installation so take care not to lose it The serial number provided by Alstom is customer specific It is the user s responsibility to keep the serial number secure Alstom uses the serial number to determine who has performed design modifications to the application software 4 2 2 Installation Prerequisites 1 No instances of CAAPE must be active during the installation process 2 The user account performing the installation must have Administrator Privileges on the computer 3 When installing CAAPE 19C or later the user must completely uninstall any CAAPE earlier than 19C including AlsDload and the Alstom USB driver through the Control Panel Programs Uninstall a program P2512A Rev J Aug 15 4 1 Alstom Signaling Inc Getting Started 4 3 INSTALLING CAAPE
261. page is used to select the hardware component around which this system is built Select a hardware component and click the Select button The name of the chosen component is displayed to the right of the button Create a hardware component from this screen by clicking the New button but the board slot assignment is not available and therefore does not make full use of subsequent screens in the System Wizard For this reason it is best to create the hardware component and assign its boards before using the System Wizard Click Next to display the Build Names page P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 51 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Build Names x Board Build Name determines the names of application files for this board Enter the board build name Queens Sys Queens1Csx1 Queens1 Vital Queens1Csx2 Queens Csx2 Set ee Figure 7 28 System Wizard Build Names When application data is generated for a hardware system files are created in the Project Workspace s FileView The user must specify the base names of these files This is done by entering Build Names Select each item in the list in turn enter its desired Build Name and click Set The entered text is listed in the Build Name column of the list See Make Files and Build for more details Click Next to display the Component Links page P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 52 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics Component Links i x Serial input message dat
262. popup menu for no items selected then choosing Select All from the popup to select all statements in the logic P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 53 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 12 2 1 Moving Within the Logic View The scroll bars arrow keys and Page Up Page Down keys can be used to move within the logic view window Ctrl Page Up moves to the top of the logic Ctrl Page Down moves just past the end of the logic If the caret flashing square is over a statement the End key moves to the right side of the statement and the Home key moves to the left side Pressing the F7 key or using Logic Go To Next in the main menu moves to the next statement below the current editing position Pressing the F8 key or using Logic Go To Previous in the main menu moves to the previous statement above the current editing position Using Logic Go To Cycle Start in the main menu moves to the statement which is executed next when simulation cycling starts 11 12 2 2 Finding Specific Statements Go to Logic Find in the main menu to open the Statement Find dialog for finding statements by result or variable name or by statement number Right click on a variable or result and go to Find Next Usage in its popup menu to go to the next equation that uses the name as a variable or result Right click on a variable and go to Find Result to go to the next equation that uses that name as a result Right click on a varia
263. pplication Files 8113 2 iVPI NVSP NVSP Main Application System Files application name NVE application name U53 application name U60 Created by NVE and UXX created by compiler Usage NVE for download Uxx for EPROM programming NVSP Comm Files system software name HEX system software name U8 system software name U9 Created by HEX copied from installed files and split into Uxx by compiler Usage HEX for download Uxx for EPROM programming 8 11 1 3 VPI CPU Il CPU II Main Application Files application name HEX application name U40 application name U41 Created by HEX created by compiler Uxx created by Split Usage HEX for download Uxx for EPROM programming CPU II Main System Files system software name HEX system software name U42 system software name U43 Created by HEX copied from installed VPI CAA Uxx created by Split Usage HEX for download Uxx for EPROM programming CPU II Comm Application Files application name HEX application name U8 application name U9 Application name is main application name plus CP Created by HEX and UXX created by compiler Usage HEX for download Uxx for EPROM programming P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 38 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 11 1 4 VPI CSEX4 NVSP Main Application System Files application name NVE application name U53 application name U60 Created by NVE and UXX created by compiler Usage NVE for download
264. pplication type of the ladder logic being edited It is possible to change the type of an equation at any time through the Equation Data dialog Editing the logic of a Boolean equation consists of adding combinations of branches and parameter variables As mentioned earlier all items on a single branch are AND ed and the contents of parallel branches are OR ed when the equation executes 7 5 6 1 Adding and Inserting Branches Move the caret over a target branch and use the nsert Branch main menu item the Insert Branch logic toolbar button or the popup menu to insert a branch onto it A parallel branch combination is created at that location If a branch is inserted onto one of the vertical lines of a parallel branch combination a new empty branch parallel to the others are inserted at that location If the Add Branch popup menu item is used the new branch is placed below the others 7 5 6 2 Drawing Branches To create a branch in parallel with existing data on a branch move the caret to one end of the data on the existing branch and get the branch popup menu Choose the Draw Branch popup menu item Move the mouse to the other end of the data on the same branch and left click there A branch is created between the two points Branches cannot be drawn between two different branches only between two points on the same branch 7 5 6 3 Inserting Variables Use the Insert Variable main menu item the Insert Variable toolbar button or th
265. processed ON NVTWC RECEIVED INT BOARD INT CHANNEL INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Called when a message is received on the board e BOARD is the board number from 1 to max e CHANNEL is the channel number POSITION is the zero based position of the control message in the list of controls assigned to the board STATUS is a pointer to an internal variable returned to the simulator Set the variable True to acknowledge that the event was processed P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 28 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference ON NVTWC SENDING INT BOARD INT CHANNEL INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Called when a message is about to be sent from the board BOARD is the board number from 1 to max CHANNEL is the channel number POSITION is the zero based position of the control message in the list of controls assigned to the board STATUS is a pointer to an internal variable returned to the simulator Set the variable True to prevent the message from actually being sent ON NVTWC SENT INT BOARD INT CHANNEL INT POSITION BOOL STATUS Called when a message is sent from the board BOARD is the board number from 1 to max CHANNEL is the channel number POSITION is the zero based position of the control message in the list of controls assigned to the board STATUS is a pointer to an internal variable returned to the simulator Set the variable True to acknowledge that the event was processed P2512A R
266. propriate boards non vital logic is assigned to the CSEX board with the ID number that matches the one assigned to the non vital application non vital serial messages are assigned to the serial ports on the boards etc When components are created they are assigned arbitrary names Components can be renamed later Go to the ComponentView right click on a component and select Rename Component P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 68 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files SECTION 8 USING APPLICATION FILES 8 1 APPLICATION FILES Application files are the files produced and used by the lower level tools such as compilers and data verifiers They include The source input files that describe the application These files may be generated by the graphical Make Files Build operations or can be directly added or imported into a project e Output files that result from operations such as compiling the source files Includes the files containing application data structures Report files that document the results of operations such as compile or data verification All application files are displayed in the FileView of the Project Workspace The FileView s display hierarchy is The top level project folder System folders created graphically or manually Application folders either corresponding to the processor boards processed graphically through a Make Files or Build or created manually Each application folder contains a
267. r P2512A Rev J Aug 15 2 2 Alstom Signaling Inc General 2 3 INTENDED AUDIENCE This manual is written for signaling application engineers and others who wish to understand the basic operation of CAAPE Before reading this manual it is important to have a working knowledge of using the Microsoft Windows operating system and running programs in that environment 2 4 DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS The following conventions are used in this manual In command lines bold text represents information that should be bold entered exactly as shown keywords rs Bold italic text is used to indicate icons to activate or selections in the bold italic menu tree italic Italic text is used to indicate a file name In command lines square brackets indicate an option To enter the option type only the information inside the brackets Do not type the brackets themselves When describing a menu selection this character is used to separate consecutive menu item choices For example File Exit means to open the File drop down menu and select the Exit item P2512A Rev J Aug 15 2 3 Alstom Signaling Inc General 2 5 COMMON ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARY Terms used throughout this manual are provided in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Common Abbreviations and Glossary Term Definition or Explanation ACO Vital AC Output board ACR CAAPE output file AD
268. r fi ba Links Point to Point ID Name vs C1 System Software 40025 322 00 REV A a Adapter Type None m Serial Messages Type Name vsc In m GQueens1 VSL10 R Messages a 8 Links Blocks Figure 7 30 Vital Serial Editing View with Component Linking P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 56 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics In the Serial Messages section at the bottom of the screen select a message type and click the Messages button The Link To Components dialog is displayed Type List scm Queens VSLTO R Available Queens VSL10 F vm Queens1 VSL13 R e Dueensl V5L11 R Queens VSL11 5 Remove dd Queensl VSL12 R Queens VSL12 S j New n 1 cian c Figure 7 31 Link to Components Dialog The Type control shows the selected message type the Available list shows all components of the correct type for linking Select a component from the list and click the Add button to link the component to the board When a component is added to a board it can be opened directly from the board s editing view Select a component if there is more than one listed and click the Open Component button In CAAPE versions later than 005K the Message Wizard button can also be clicked to set the contents of a selected message from a list of available variables See Section 7 8 9 Message Wizard GR Open Component button Ij Mess
269. r application 1 Messages to other VPI nodes that contain large applications 2 Messages to other VPI nodes that contain medium applications 3 Messages to other VPI nodes that contain small applications 4 AFCPU2 and microWlU nodes Application Revision History Board Network VSoE Network SC New wsoe Type Name Device Line Pot 4 VSOE17 NO4VPN IVPS Redundant VSOE18 NO4VPN TC P Redundant VSOE1 NO4VPN AFCPU1 Redundant VSOE2 NO4VPN AFCPU2 Redundant VSOE3 NO4VPN AFCPU3 Redundant VSOE4 NO4VPN AFCPU4 Redundant VSOE5 NO4VPN AFCPUS Redundant VSOE6 NO4VPN AFCPUB Redundant VSOE 7 NO4VPN AFCPU Redundant VSOE8 NO4VPN AFCPUSB Redundant VSOES NO4VPN AFCPUS Redundant KINAPA BS rima ames imma Remove 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 Serial Messages Type Name vsoE In VSOE18_NO4IVP TC P Messages Al Figure 7 12 VSP CPU2 Board VSOE dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 22 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics TA EDITING MESSAGE COMPONENTS Message components are used to represent the various messages sent or received by hardware boards Representing messages as components allows the same message data to be reused in multiple places in the project Each message type has a specific editing screen that is used when editing the message data Message editing consists of specifying any options such as binary address and defining the variable names that make up the message bits
270. r example Check whether the string contained in variable ADDR is 00110 CALL STRING COMPARE ADDR 00110 ARE EQUAL IF ARE EQUAL TRUE Function ADDRESS TO BIN address addressHI addressLO Converts a text string containing a binary address to integer values Since a message address can be up to 32 bits long and integer values in application logic are only 16 bits upper and lower values are returned If the numeric value of the address is less than 65536 the upper value can be ignored This function can be used when the numerical value of a message address must be used in simulation logic e address is a string or a string variable containing a binary address e addressHl returns the upper integer value of the address e addressLO returns the lower integer value of the address For example Check whether the address in variable ADDRESS STRING is 56 CALL ADDRESS TO BIN ADDRESS STRING HI ADDR LO ADDR IF LO_ADDR 56 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 24 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 5 PROTOCOL DEFINITION FILE FORMAT A Protocol Definition File is a specialized type of simulation logic file The main difference is that the user can define Event Handler functions which are automatically called whenever certain events occur in serial communications The user can add code to these handlers to perform special operations such as setting or checking special message bits See Section 13 3 Simulation Logic File F
271. r is called the Project Workspace It displays the contents of a CAAPE project The Project Workspace contains three tabs the ProjectView the ComponentView and the FileView These tabs display different elements of the project the ProjectView displays graphical systems the ComponentView displays graphical components and the FileView displays the input report and output files used by the compilers data verifiers and other tools These terms are explained in detail later in this manual The Project Workspace is dockable it can be moved to and anchored at various positions within the main window or undocked and floated anywhere within or outside the main window Right click over the Project Workspace to get a popup menu with its docking options The blank area to the right of the Project Workspace is called the Edit Workspace It contains various types of editing and print preview windows The windows in the Edit Workspace is organized in standard Windows multiple document fashion similar to other programs that can display multiple documents at one time The white area across the bottom is the Message Workspace This area displays status and error messages resulting from various CAAPE operations such as compiling The messages displayed in this window can be saved to a file if desired Like the Project Workspace the Message Workspace is dockable The status bar on the very bottom currently displaying For Help displays certain status me
272. r its binary address value or its position in the list of messages of a given type which have been assigned to the port All functions that access non vital serial messages can use either address or position to identify the message Function GET NVSERSP ADDR port address check address bits message bit return value Returns the value of the specified bit in a special message specified by its serial port and address e port is the serial port from 1 to max e address is a string giving the message address e check address bits is TRUE if the number of address bits is significant e message bit is the message bit where 1 is the first bit e return value is the name of a Boolean variable which gets the value of the special message bit For example Get the second bit of the special message with address 1101 on port 1 CALL GET NVSERSPY 1 1101 TRUE 2 NEWVAL Function GET NVSERSP POSN port position message bit return value Returns the value of the specified bit in a special message specified by its serial port and position e port is the serial port from 1 to max e position is the zero based position of the special message e message bit is the message bit where 1 is the first bit e return value is the name of a Boolean variable which gets the value of the special message bit P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 20 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference For example Get the second bit of the first special message on
273. racing and is used by logic statements that examine date Format SETDATE dd mm yy where dd mm yy are the day month and year Example SETDATE 08 30 06 SETTIME Set the current simulation time This is the time that is shown in logic tracing and is used by logic statements that examine time Format SETTIME hh mm ss where hh mm ss are the hours minutes and seconds Example SETTIME 11 00 00 SHOWTEXT Causes the specified text to be displayed on the program s status bar Ignored if the script is not being run interactively Format SHOWTEXT text where text is the text to display Example SHOWTEXT display this text P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 48 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference SIM Execute the application logic of the current application for the specified number of logic statements If tracing or monitors are set the affected equations are displayed as they execute See CYC for executing logic by time or cycles Formats SIM execute the next single logic statement SIM num statements execute the specified number of statements from the cur rent starting point where num statements is the number of statements to execute If the end of the logic is reached before this count is done execution continues from the beginning of the logic Examples SIM SIM 10 SKIP Sets a skip of the specified logic statement in the current application The simulator skips the specified statement when
274. re 8 4 Library File Editor Members Page P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 12 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files When adding a library member specify the name and type The library member editing dialog is displayed homem j x Properties Logic Arguments Name Adi Insert gt gt Remove r Logic Statements BOOL DIR READY DIR JNLOCK PL Figure 8 5 Library Member Editor P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 13 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files Enter the member properties and logic data Member properties include a text field for entering description or revision data Member logic data consists of the Arguments which are the generic names to be substituted with real names when the member is used and the Logic Statements which are inserted into the application when the member is used The generic argument names are identified in the logic statements by enclosing them in square brackets they can make up all or part of the variable names in a logic statement For example in BOOL DIR READY DIR UNLOCK PL DIR is a generic name that makes up part of the variable names In this example BOOL TEST A N B A and B are generic names that constitute entire variable names in the statement Context sensitive help can be obtained by pressing the F1 key when the library file editor is open 8 6 3 Including Library Files Library files can be us
275. re board build name NVApp CTC2v application folder name NVApp Application files NVApp xxx e g NVApp NV CSEX4 hardware board build name NVApp CSEX4 application folder name NVApp Application files NVAPP xxx e g NVApp NV iVPI GTP hardware board build name GTPBD1 iVPI GTP application folder name GTPBD1 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 66 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 710 IMPORTING GRAPHICAL DATA It is possible to reuse graphical data from another CAAPE project create certain types of components from text files or create an entire graphical system from text files Use caution when importing Link Protocol Command components from text files If the wrong type of component is selected for the data that is actually in the file or if a file of the wrong version is selected read errors may occur The resulting component data may be in an indeterminate state and subsequent editing of the component may be difficult or impossible The source LPC text files contain numerical data with no information on their target protocol type or version number If the wrong protocol type or version is chosen when importing the data the results are not predictable 7 10 1 Importing Components from Other Projects Go to the top level folder in the ComponentView Right click and select one of the following e Import Component CAAPE prompts for a source project file then display the compone
276. recaution Headings and Location Safety Precaution Heading Found on page Overview Manual Must Be Read In Entirety 1 2 Modification of CAAPE and CAA Prohibited 1 2 2 2 Vital Communications Require Unique Link and Block Settings 1 3 7 18 DigiSAFE Communications Require Unique VSP Board ID 1 3 7 19 Digi SAFE Communications Require Unique Zone Controller ID 1 4 7 21 DigiSAFE Communications Require Unique Network IDs 1 4 7 21 Intended Safe Functionality of the VPI System Must Be Verified 1 4 8 32 VPI Application Must Be Validation Tested 1 5 8 32 VPI Application Must Be Field Tested 1 5 8 33 ADV Input Data Must be Verified Separately Prior to ADV 1 5 8 33 Process Verifier Must Be Different Than Designer 1 6 8 33 Software Revision Control Must Be Maintained 1 6 9 1 Unique Site ID Control Must Be Maintained 1 7 9 2 Accurate Software Revision ID Control Must Be Maintained 1 8 9 3 Unique System ID Control Must Be Maintained 1 9 9 4 Programming VSP Board Overwrites FSSVT Settings 1 9 9 5 FSSVT Modifications Must Be Field Tested 1 10 9 7 FSSVT Passwords Must Be Protected 1 10 9 7 FSSVT Signature Values Must Be Verified 1 10 9 7 FSSVT Modifications Must Be Verified 1 11 9 8 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 1 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions 1 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The generic term VPI is used to refer to VPI VPI Il and iVPI except where their
277. rmation in the PROM files The CAAPE also outputs the protocol numbers in the application definition file which is read by the Graphical Simulator The Graphical Simulator can then use the protocol identifier numbers to read Protocol Definition Files telling it how to perform serial communications based on the specific protocol assigned to a given serial port or TWC NVTWC board The master lists of available Protocol Definition files are contained in the Protocols directory off the main Graphical Simulator directory They are SimProtocols dat and SimTwcProtocols dat respectively for non vital serial and TWC NVTWC These files contain a series of records linking available protocol identification numbers to their corresponding Protocol Definition files Protocol identification numbers must be the same as those used by the CAAPE Protocol Definition files contain symbol declarations and simulation logic statements which are executed once per cycle of the main application logic Logic statements can include e Any normal simulation logic statement e Special predefined simulator logic functions especially those provided for message processing and for accessing special message bits e Special Event Handler functions that are automatically called when certain serial communications events occur See Section 13 5 Protocol Definition File Format for details on how to construct a Protocol Definition file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 40 Alstom Signalin
278. s VCn VPI CSEX message definition files Named in VPC and CSI files VNT VSoE node declarations Named in VPC and VCC files CW Vital Serial link definition file Used for point to point Vital Serial and VSoE only Named in VPC and VCC files VSL Point to point Vital Serial VSoE and Code Rate Generator message definition file Named in VPC file ATP Multidrop Vital Serial message definition file Named in VPC file CSS Non vital serial communications message definition file Named in CSI file TWn Train to Wayside TWC communications message definition file Named in CSI file LPC Link protocol file communications protocol configuration data Named in CONFIGURATION FILE records in CSS or TWn files LOG Data logger definitions file Named in CSI file PRM Logic parameters file declares names of internal logic parameters Named in VPC and CSI files NOTICE The contents of this file could also be placed directly in the VTL or NV file in most cases VTL Vital logic file Named in VPC file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 5 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure Table 12 5 Compiler Input Files Cont File Description NV Non vital logic file Named in CSI file NVS VSoE network connection definitions Named in VCC file Table 12 6 Other Input Files File Description LBA Label Annotation file Used by VPI I O label generating programs to add comments f
279. s r Application Clean Files a Description Remove System Rename System Import AFTCS XML Designer P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 10 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects Table 5 2 Importing an AFTC5 XML File to a VPI II IVPI Hardware System Cont Step Procedure The XML File selection dialog window opens This allows the user to browse to the XML files and select up to 18 XML files to import at a time Import AFTC5 Network XML System Network XML File Click the OK to start the import process The CAAPE Output Window shows the process of the import and any Warning or Error messages E canne projecteren M H aaa File Actions View Options Window Help al aue e e tel E Ca E230 Project E E230 NORMAL SYSTEM iVPI Sy E230 STANDBY SYSTEM VPI MEE Co E230VPI vPI Nino Ezar Bg Projectview 23 Component iem GP Fileview Pme Lb Processing Non vital Network Board information Processing NVSoE Local Comm Port Node 6 for NVSP board Processing NVSP Network Port 5 Processing NV Remote Comm Port Node NVSOE AFTC5 IL4 for NYSP board Warning NVSP Net Remote Connection NYSOE AFTC5 IL4 exist It will be modified to import settings NYSP Net Remote Connection NVSOE AFTC5 IL4 Main Device settings ENET1 10 4 5 1 255 255 255 0 52000 NYSP Net Remote Connection NVSOE A
280. sed A single component can be linked as both an input received message and an output transmitted message MVSC boards require point to point ATP message components to specify the messages they send and receive Open the board and go to the Serial Messages section Click the Messages button to add message components CRG boards require CRG message components to specify the messages they send and receive Open the board and go to the Serial Messages section Click the Messages button to add a message component CPU Il and VSP boards with Vital Serial Over Ethernet VSOE require Vital Serial message components to specify the messages they send and receive Open the board and go to the VSOE tab Select a VSOE node from the list and click the Messages button to add message components How the component can be used depends on the node type VSP boards with DigiSAFE require Vital Serial message components to specify the messages they send and receive Open the board and go to the DigiSafe tab Select a DigiSAFE node from the list and click the Messages button to add message components NVSP and CSEXA boards with networking require non vital serial message components to specify the network messages they send and receive Open the board go to the Network Ports tab select a network port number and go to the Serial Messages section on the tab Click the Messages button to add message components Link Protocol Components The user has the option
281. sed directly use the files created for each PROM chip instead NVE IVPI NVSP or VPI CSEX4 PROM data file Created by non vital compiler and split for PROM burning Prom code files for individual VPI CPU chips Created by Split U14 PMGR1 U2 PMGR2 U15 PMGR3 U3 PMGR4 U16 APMGR1 U4 APMGR2 U17 APMGR3 U5 APMGR4 U20 APMGR5 U8 APMGR6 Prom code files for individual CPU PD chips Created by Split U16 SYS LO U17 SYS HI U19 ADS LO U18 ADS HI Prom code files for individual CPU Il or VSP Main chips Created by Split U42 SYS LO U43 SYS HI U41 ADS LO U40 ADS HI P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 8 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure Table 12 8 Output Files ASCII hex Format Cont File Description U8 Prom code files for individual CPU Il or VSP comm chips U9 Created by Comm compiler Prom code files for individual CSEX chips Created by non vital compiler U36 CSEX1 System U49 CSEX1 System U37 CSEX1 Application U50 CSEX1 Application U36 CSEX2 System Application U37 CSEX2 System Application ODD CSEX3 System Application EVN CSEX3 System Application U53 Prom system application files for individual iVPI NVSP or VPI2 U60 CSEXA Main chips Created by non vital compiler U8 Prom code files for individual iVPI NVSP or VPI2 CSEX4 Comm U9 chips Created by non vital compiler P2512A Rev J Aug 15 12 9 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure
282. sing the Graphical Simulator 11 16 USING SNAPSHOTS Snapshots capture the current state of the simulation session and can be used to restore the simulation to that state at a later time Simulation state includes data such as the current value of application variables the current state of timer equations etc Snapshots might be used if it is necessary to stop a session and pick it back up later A snapshot becomes invalid once any change is made to any application logic statements have been added or deleted variables have been renamed etc To save simulation data in a snapshot file go to Project Snapshot Save in the main menu Enter the file path of the snapshot file and click OK The current simulation state is saved and a numeric signature of the project s applications is calculated and saved as well The application signature is used to determine whether an application was changed To read a snapshot file go to Project Snapshot Read in the main menu Browse to the snapshot file and click OK The application signature in the snapshot file is compared to the signature for the current applications to verify that no changes have been made since the snapshot file was saved If no application changes have occurred the simulation session is restored to the state saved in the snapshot file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 63 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 17 RELAY FILES Relay files can be created to lis
283. sponsibility to verify the correctness of the VPI input data in that it accurately represents the intended safe functionality of the VPI system Furthermore verify the correctness means that the signaling engineer 1 is required to compare the input and output data files to verify the CAA has operated correctly and 2 must test the VPI application in its intended environment before it can be placed in revenue service Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 4 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions VPI APPLICATION MUST BE VALIDATION TESTED Prior to revenue service validation testing must confirm all VPI application logic is correct and consistent with application requirements Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment VPI APPLICATION MUST BE FIELD TESTED Field testing of a VPI application is required before placing the location into revenue service The customer s testing plan and safety plan define the testing requirements for the VPI application Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment ADV INPUT DATA MUST BE VERIFIED SEPARATELY PRIOR TO ADV PROCESS Vital
284. ssages It also displays the description of menu items and toolbar buttons as the cursor is moved over them P2512A Rev J Aug 15 4 4 Alstom Signaling Inc Getting Started Figure 4 2 is an example of the main CAAPE window when a project is open and CAAPE is being used to do graphical editing FG CAAPE VPlLogic SprYital File Edit Actions View Insert Tools Configure Window Help a cma e 2 ajajalle a j 8 NO ITEM Insert Equation F3 Insert Comment F10 Insert Group F11 Insert Function F5 Popup Menu F2 L3 vpi04b C9 TestvPl VPI Sy SprCSEX1 CTC2v GH C Output E E Report TESTVPILHDW SprCSEX1 PRM SpiCSEXT1 NV El Co SEY1 vro hBProject iew 3 Component ew Ef FileView Processing input data Processing boolean parameter section Processing integer parameter section Processing timer parameter section Processing VPI system module Processing VPI communications section zi Iii ui For Help press F1 E XCaapeNApps vpi 4b e ERR E Figure 4 2 Main CAAPE Window with Open Project Be aware that The Project Workspace contains project data The FileView tab is currently being displayed and shows project file contents in a hierarchical tree format The Edit Workspace contains two windows a project information window and an open VPI Logic editing window The VPI Logic window is active and its title appears in
285. statements for printing Left click over a statement to select it to select multiple statements at a time click over them while pressing the Ctrl key or use the mouse to draw a box around them while holding down the left mouse button Another option is View Selection Select Statements in the main menu to select statements based on type or contents If no statements are selected the default is to print everything P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 45 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 13 3 2 Print Page Setup Go to File Page Setup Settings in the main menu The Page Setup dialog is displayed Use the Options tab to select options including the type of print symbols that are used Page Setup Bi Options Sizes Page Header Page Footer Relay Coil on Right Symbols lv Separate Equation Text Logic Drop Line Mosaic Print lv Show Equation Text Print Equation Index IT Include Variables Print Application Index Apply Figure 8 9 Graphical Logic Print Page Setup Options P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 46 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files Use the Sizes tab to set margins magnify or reduce the print and select text fonts Page Setup E x Options Sizes Page Header Page Footer Margins p Fonts Left fi Category Right jas mmm Statement Text Modify Font w arial 10 Bottom 0 5 Logic Magnification Sample Text 100 m Sample
286. sted in the Message Window as the simulator cycles and the format of the listing Logging options specify whether trace information is sent to a file as well as listed in a window Monitors can be used to select particular equations to be listed To set general trace and logging information go to Setup Trace and Logging in the main menu The Trace and Logging dialog is displayed Trace and Logging x Application ALL m Display Values Decimal C Hexadecimal C Don t Display Logging Log File D Ead Enable Logging Figure 11 14 Trace and Logging Dialog Enter and save information in the dialog To set statement monitors for a selected application open the Simulator Options dialog and use the Monitors page to add or remove monitors Special simulator statements can be added to simulation logic to log user messages and variable values See SECTION 13 Simulator Reference or online Help for more details P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 26 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 9 Setting Up Special Messages For non vital applications the operation of non vital serial and TWC NVTWC messages may depend on the specific protocol selected for the serial port or the TWC NVTWC board For example the usage of special message bits may vary depending on protocol The Graphical Simulator provides two ways to customize simulation based on a selected protocol Use Message Events to
287. stem s safety integrity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any designs or for the safe performance of the train control system P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 4 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Change Process 3 Rebuilding and recompiling the application 4 Running the Application Data Verifier ADV and viewing the consolidation reports to verify that the compile created correct application data 5 Programming the memory devices PROGRAMMING VSP BOARD OVERWRITES FSSVT SETTINGS Programming an application into a VSP board erases and overwrites the previous application including all FSSVT settings Any previous field updates to FSSVT settings will be overwritten and the FSSVT settings will be configured per the programmed application Failure to monitor and oversee these FSSVT values are as desired can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment 6 Updating the hardware configuration per the new Revision ID compiled in the application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 9 5 Alstom Signaling Inc Application Change Process For VPI and VPI Il refer to the application vc file for the CPU PD or CPU2 wire table in order to configure the hardware jumper wires for the compiled REVISION and SITE ID values Alternatively refer to the application cfg file for the SYSTEM ID The SYSTEM ID is equiva
288. stom Signaling Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic Page 7 5 3 8 Using Cut and Paste uctor eR Goad be ORC GEAR wa 7 32 7 5 3 9 Using Drag and Drop 2 7 33 7 5 3 10 Changing the Appearance of the Logic Editing Screen 7 33 7 5 4 Inserting Stalements uv 25 29 ed RE EAR ye RE gn p 7 34 7 5 5 Editing Statement Properties cece 7 36 7 5 6 Editing Boolean Equations ex e keene X REED ES 7 36 7 5 6 1 Adding and Inserting Branches lis 7 36 7 5 6 2 Drawing BranGnes ss ua spp r Se Cr WOE OR NADA 7 36 7 5 6 3 Inserting Variables iu iw Wee CER ERROR REN TE A 7 36 7 5 6 4 Editing Variable Data 0 0000 00 a 7 37 7 5 6 5 Selecting Equation Data 7 37 7 5 6 6 Deleting Equation Data 0 aa 7 37 7 5 6 7 Transferring Equation Data 7 38 7 5 6 8 Variable Selection List 2 2 ll cece eee eae 7 38 7 5 6 9 Setting Internal Variable Types 7 38 7 5 6 10 setting Relay Slates isse ossis ote ad A n 7 39 7 5 6 10 1 Equation Variables 0 aa naaa 7 39 7 5 6 10 2 Equation TREOSUNS ice 59 9 e each RR ER EIS Be 7 40 7 5 6 10 3 Compatibility with Older Versions of CAAPE 7 40 7 5 7 Deleting StatementS x xu vou WAWALA RN OE DOE ERR d 7 41 7 5 8 Commenting Uncommenting Statements 7 41 7 5 9 Using Find Replace and Go To a 7 41 7 5 10 Defining Gonstants x eee
289. t and report files created when they are processed by the appropriate CAA programs There is always a main input file which contains documentation records and usually refers to the other input files using INCLUDE records Main files are identified by their extensions filename VPC for Vital filename CSI for non vital filename VCC for network communications The other input files contain text records describing the hardware messages and logic required to run some part of a hardware system 8 4 1 Application Types Application types are e CSEXA files for a VPI CSEX4 board e CTC2s files for a CenTraCode Il s CPU board e CTC2v files for a VPI CSEX1 CSEX2 or CSEX3 board e iVPI GTP CAAPE files for an iVPI GTP board A separate GTP CAA tool is used for GTP application development the GTP application in CAAPE is only for files shared between CAAPE and GTP CAA e iVPI NVSP files for an iVPI NVSP board Main and Comm Processors e iVPI VSP Comm files for an iVPI VSP board Comm Processor e iVPI VSP Main files for an iVPI VSP board Main Processor e VPI files for a VPI CPU PD board e VPI2 Comm files for a VPI CPU II board Comm Processor e VPI2 Main files for a VPI CPU II board Main Processor P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 4 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files 8 4 2 Adding Applications Add an application when the main input file does not already exist Right click a system folder and select Add Applicatio
290. t or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any designs or for the safe performance of the train control system PROGRAMMING VSP BOARD OVERWRITES FSSVT SETTINGS Programming an application into a VSP board erases and overwrites the previous application including all FSSVT settings Any previous field updates to FSSVT settings will be overwritten and the FSSVT settings will be configured per the programmed application Failure to monitor and oversee these FSSVT values are as desired can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 9 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions FSSVT MODIFICATIONS MUST BE FIELD TESTED All changes made to the FSSVT must be field tested to validate the intended timer values of any modified timers are observed to be correct in actual operation prior to the return of revenue service Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment FSSVT PASSWORDS MUST BE PROTECTED FSSVT passwords shall be provided only to responsible personnel that have been properly trained in the FSSVT modification veri
291. t the quiescent states of the variables for use by the Relay Equivalent Drawing Package REDP These files are needed only if Logic Information Files VTI or NVI are not available The procedure for generating a relay file is found in Table 11 3 Table 11 3 Generate a Relay File Step Procedure 1 Setup and run the simulator to put the variables into their quiescent states Mark the equations to whose variables are output 2 This can be done through the Relay File page of the Simulator Options dialog and or through the Ladder Logic View In most cases all equations should be marked 3 Go to the Relay File page of the Simulator Options dialog and click Generate File to create the file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 64 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE File Structure SECTION 12 CAAPE FILE STRUCTURE 12 1 INTRODUCTION This section describes the basic directory and file structure of CAAPE 12 2 CAAPE DIRECTORIES The main CAAPE directory is created and filled when CAAPE is installed It includes the CAAPE program and the various libraries it uses and includes the subdirectories listed in Table 12 1 Table 12 1 CAAPE Subdirectories Subdirectory Description Apps Default location for new CAAPE projects Using this directory is optional a different one can be specified in CAAPE User Preferences Ctcfiles Non vital system software and protocol files Gfe ActiveX components use
292. take some time if the system is a large one Message Wizard Assign Variables Move variables from Available to Used to assign them to the message Type All F Match Available 1G2 CONT 1GZ5 CONT AVAR Show Unused Variables Only Finish Cancel Figure 7 34 Message Wizard Assign Variables Page P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 62 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics The Assign Variables page displays a list of the available variables along with a list of the variables currently used in the message The list of available variables is filterable by type variables in both lists are alphabetically ordered for easy searching or enter text in the Match control to search for variables whose names start with the entered text e Select available variables and use the gt gt button to assign them to the message or e Select used variables and use the lt lt button to remove them from the message When finished the new message contents are saved The Message Wizard provides an easy way to see what variables are currently used in a message and change the message s contents based on a list of candidate variables However direct manual editing of the message is still required to specify the exact order of the variables in the message add PERMONE or PERMZERO bits or add multiple instances of the same variable to a single message P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 63 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics
293. tatement numbers are not specified and the simulator automatically assigns them f not used STATEMENT n must preceded each statement where n is the statement number AUTONUMBER should generally be used in manually created applications e Statements are entered the same way they as in text mode CAAPE application logic The simulator is much more flexible in processing statement types than the CAAPE s compilers any valid statement type can be used in any type of application For example IF ELSE or WHILE statements can be entered manually for Vital applications For example LOGIC AUTONUMBER APPLICATION APP LOGIC BOOL X Y IF X Z COUNT COUNT 1 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 6 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 7 Hardware Section This section describes I O options boards and switches This section can be fairly complex only the basics are described here The section format is HARDWARE OPTIONS option1 option2 BOARDS board1 board2 SWITCHES bank1 bank2 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 7 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 7 1 Options Hardware options specify flash and pulse widths in milliseconds For example OPTIONS FLASH 500 FLASH2 250 PULSE 200 PULSE2 400 13 2 7 2 Boards The data format is module slot type boardinfo e module is the module number e slot is the slot number e type is the board type
294. te printer plotter files for labels to be placed on the front covers of the modules in a VPI system These label files show board slots LED positions and other useful information about the physical layout of the system They are of good quality for printing on paper or transparent Mylar In the compiler run controls for a VPI application specify that I O labels are to be generated and select the type of printer plotter that is used The compiler creates a temporary LBL file containing hardware information and the CAAPE automatically passes this file to a utility that creates the label files One label file is created per module HP plotter files are designed for HP7580B origin and size Label file extensions are HPS for the system module and HP1 HP2 HP3 and HP4 for extender modules Ilt is possible to create a label annotation file containing additional comments that are added to the labels for certain boards Since these comments are not contained in the normal compiler input files the input files do not have to be changed to add them This helps preserve revision control of the input files P2512A Rev J Aug 15 8 29 Alstom Signaling Inc Using Application Files One possible use for the label annotation file is to put PROM checksums or CRCs on the labels ds Perform the compiles to generate PROM files and calculate the PROM checksums and CRCs Checksum and CRC data is saved in the compiler configuration reports Create
295. teger variable For example SYMTYPES Boolean 1 O Integer 2 2 Timer 3 1 Serial Input 4 0 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 4 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 5 Symbols Section This section lists all the symbols used anywhere in the application All variables must be declared in this section The section format is SYMBOLS name1code1 name2code2 e name is the symbol name Ifthe symbol is a local variable in a subroutine the name is in format subroutinename variablename If itis passed to the subroutine by address it is preceded by a amp If the variable is an array its size is specified in brackets after the name For example SUBRT BYVALUE local variable BYVALUE in subroutine SUBRT passed by value amp SUBRT BYADDR local variable BYADDR in subroutine SUBRT passed by address ARRAYVAR 25 a 25 element array variable code is the type code which must be the same as the code in the Symbol Types Section for this variable s type For example uses type codes from Symbol Types example note how the symbol type codes match SYMBOLS BOOL VAR 1 BOOL ARRAY 25 1 INTEGER 1 2 INTEGER 2 2 SERIAL IN 1 4 TIMER VAR 3 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 5 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 6 Logic Section This section defines the application logic statements The section format is LOGIC AUTONUMBER statement1 statement2 e AUTONUMBER is a record indicating that s
296. tement in the current application The simulator halts when the result of this statement changes state Formats CHG var name CHG amp stmt num where var name is the name of a result of the equation on which to set the breakpoint stmt num is the hexadecimal statement number of the statement on which to set the breakpoint Examples CHG LAMP OUT2 CHG amp 1F4 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 35 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference CLR Clears breakpoints monitors and skips for the current application Formats CLR ALL clears all breakpoints and monitors CLR BRK clears all breakpoints CLR BRK var name clears a breakpoint by result name CLR BRK amp stmt num clears a breakpoint by statement number CLR CHG clears all change breakpoints CLR CHG var name clears a change breakpoint by result name CLR CHG amp stmt num clears a change breakpoint by statement number CLR MON clears all monitors CLR MON var name clears a monitor by result name CLR MON amp stmt num clears a monitor by statement number CLR SKIP clears all skips CLR SKIP var name clears a skip by result name CLR SKIP amp stmt num clears a skip by statement number where var name is the name of a result of the equation on which to clear the breakpoint stmt num is the hexadecimal statement number of the statement on which to clear the breakpoint Examples CLR ALL CLR BRK LAMP OUT2 CLR BRK amp 1F4 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 36 Alstom Signaling Inc
297. the CAAPE s FileView and click Cancel Manual Date Time P2512A Rev J Aug 15 10 3 Alstom Signaling Inc Configuration Control 10 3 CAA VERSIONS The CAA version number is stored in various report files created during compile and other operations There may be multiple versions of CAA packages on a given PC depending on what versions of CAAPE have been previously installed Installing a new CAAPE does not automatically remove any old CAA versions so CAA packages tend to accumulate if new versions of CAAPE are installed This is useful when it is necessary to use old CAA packages to maintain previous work A list of installed CAA packages can be viewed directly from CAAPE 008A and later If a CAAPE project is open then close it first then go to Actions Manage CAA Packages in the main menu The CAA Packages browser dialog is displayed x Type wm sg CAA Rev 600b Remove ReadMe Figure 10 2 CAA Packages Browser P2512A Rev J Aug 15 10 4 Alstom Signaling Inc Configuration Control Select a CAA package and click Remove to uninstall it If the CAA package has a ReadMe file click ReadMe to view the file in the default text editor In older versions of CAAPE a CAA package can be removed by going to CAAPE in the Windows Menu bar and choosing the CAA uninstall menu item These menu items are only available until a new CAAPE install is performed The ability to uninstall a CAA package is also available by going to
298. the file The file header format is APPLICATION SIMULATOR DATA FILE VERSION 2 APPTYPE type e type is VPI CTC2V CTC2S VSP iVpiVSP oriVPINVSP P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 2 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 3 Documentation Section This section contains optional records describing customer information The section format is DOCUMENTATION CUSTOMER customer name CONTRACT contract name LOCATION equipment location CIRCUITREV month day year Multiple CIRCUITREV records can exist one for each logic revision For example DOCUMENTATION CUSTOMER LONG ISLAND RAILROAD CIRCUITREV 01 31 02 CIRCUITREV 02 02 02 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 3 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference 13 2 4 Symbol Types Section This section defines the types of symbols in the application and how the types are listed in the simulator s variable selector windows Note that if creating a dummy application the symbol types do not have to be consistent with those used in the actual product A simplified list of symbols can be used The section format is SYMTYPES name1 code flags1 name2 code2 flags2 e name is the readable symbol type name e g BOOLEAN or INTEGER in quotes if the name contains spaces e code is a unique numerical code that identifies the type flags indicate special properties of the type 0 a non timer Boolean True False variable 1 a timer variable 2 an in
299. then be gathered from all the applications in a project and stored in an external file for import into MMS There are two ways to create MMS files e Manually by right clicking on the project folder in CAAPE s ProjectView or FileView and selecting Generate MMS File in the popup menu e Automatically whenever any application in the project is compiled by setting the Generate MMS File on Compile project option See Figure 5 7 The MMS file is always named project name mms where project name is the name of the project The file is placed in the project directory The sync process is performed by the MMS Editor MMS imports the mms file generated by CAAPE Within MMS Editor the user must run the Import From CAAPE Wizard for the first build or Synchronize to CAAPE for a changed application P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 14 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects 5 8 ARCHIVING PROJECT FILES Copy files from an open project to an archive directory by selecting File Copy Project To from the main menu and browsing to the target directory The Copy Project options that were set in User Preferences determine which files are copied The entire project directory can also be copied to an archive directory by going outside CAAPE See the following topic Changing Project Directories for what happens when a project is moved to a different directory P2512A Rev J Aug 15 5 15 Alstom Signaling Inc CAAPE Projects 5 9 CHANGING PROJECT DIRECTORIE
300. ty shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any designs or for the safe performance of the train control system P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 8 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions UNIQUE SYSTEM ID CONTROL MUST BE MAINTAINED Failure to properly assign maintain and control a unique System ID for each VPI system within the entire train control system can result in unintended consequences including death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment Alstom strongly recommends that strict control of the System IDs be maintained so that the expected configuration of all VPls within the entire train control system is the actual installed configuration For train control systems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transi
301. ue FLASH Output is Flashing at specified rate Entered value is the time the output stays true or false during the flash period e g 500 ms for a rate of 60 cycles per minute FLASHB Output is inverse flashing at specified rate FLASH2 Same as FLASH FLASH2B Same as FLASHB PULSE Output pulses once for specified period PULSE2 Same as PULSE To simulate an output error condition such as broken filament select the appropriate failure mode and click Update The failure mode becomes active when the application processes outputs P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 48 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 11 4 3 Switches To view and edit switches in the application s hardware select the hardware folder in the Project Contents Window and go to Edit Switches in its popup menu The Switches Edit dialog is displayed for editing switch values aax Close DIP SWITCHES P2512A Rev J Aug 15 m Switches v SWITCH 1 SWITCH2 M SWITCH 3 v SWITCH 4 SWITCH 5 SWITCH 6 Iv SWITCH 7 v SWITCH 8 Iv SWITCH 9 SWITCH 10 Iv SWITCH 11 Iv SWITCH 12 SWITCH 13 SWITCH 14 v SWITCH 15 Iv SWITCH 16 Figure 11 24 Switches Edit Dialog 11 49 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 11 5 Using Track Plan Simulation Opening a track plan in Run mode allows the track plan to update its display as simulation is performed and allows the user to set the run time modes of tr
302. ugh the original text formatting is lost in the process See Importing Components from Text for details 8 13 3 Logic Print Window 8 13 3 1 Opening the Logic Print Window To open a Logic Print Window go to the application folder in CAAPE s FileView window and select Print Graphical Logic from its popup menu The application s VTL or NV file is read and converted into graphical format which is displayed in the Logic Print Window for printing The exact process by which a Logic Print Window is opened is as follows 1 The application s main VPC or CSI file is opened Customer information records such as Customer Name Contract Name and Equipment Location are read to provide available header and footer information for the logic printout 2 The VPC or CSI file is examined for an INCLUDE record which points to an application logic file whose contents are then read and converted into graphical format This ensures that the logic actually used by the application is printed if a logic file is in an application folder but is not referred to by the main application file it cannot be printed using this method 3 If a Logic Information File VTI or NVI exists in the folder it is read to provide relay state information normally open and normally closed states for the printout Logic Information Files are automatically generated by the Make Files process in CAAPE version 005C and later The Logic Print Window allows selection of specific
303. unique to each other and to any other ID throughout the entire DigiSAFE network Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment Application Revision History Board Network VSoE DigiSafe Network SC New DigiSate Type Name Device zcib Pm 1 DS_PEER DS 01 Redundant 1234 DigiSafe Remove DS PEER DS 02 Redundant 3456 Digiafe Edt r Serial Messages Type Name DigiSafe In bu digisafe msgs Messages a Figure 7 11 VSP Board DigiSafe Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 21 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 3 13 Ordering of Vital Messages In CAAPE a list of defined VSOE nodes may be viewed by opening the vital processor board either a VPI CPU2 board or an iVPI VSP board and then selecting the VSOE tab On this tab the nodes may be reordered by selecting a node and then clicking on the Up and Down buttons to move the node up and down within the list The order of the nodes in the list reflects the message transmission order from the vital processor board VSOE node 1 transmits first during the system cycle VSOE communications operate most efficiently based on the following order based on application size determined by the number of equations and VSOE nodes a large application contains more logic equations or VSOE nodes than a smalle
304. urrent absent NTrue varname Y Set variable False PRog varname List statement by result name PRog amp nnn List statement by statement number PRog amp nnn amp mmm List statements by range of statement numbers Prog List all statements PTR nnn Set logic execution to statement nnn Reset AOCD Y Set all load currents present Reset CPU Y Set equation pointer to start all variables False Reset LAMP X Set all filaments intact Reset SIM Y Reset All Reset VALUE Y Set all variables False RMark varname Y Relay file mark equation by result number RMark amp nnn Y Relay file mark equation by statement number RMark amp nnn amp mmm Y Relay file mark equations by range of statement numbers RMark Y Relay file mark all equations RUNMARK varname Y Relay file unmark equation by result name P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 57 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference Table 13 4 Application Level Commands Cont Command Capture Meaning RUNMARK amp nnn Y Relay file unmark equation by statement number RUNMARK amp nnn amp mmm Y Relay file unmark equations by range of statement numbers RUNMARK Y Relay file unmark all equations SET varname value Set variable to specified value Sim nnn Y Step application for nnn statements Sim Step application for one statement SKIP varname Y Add skip by result name SKIP amp nnn Y Add skip by statement number Time varname mm ss Y Set tim
305. variables are not automatically cleared each cycle Using TRUE or NTRUE on latched control bit variables is safe because the simulator does not automatically clear them unless a new message is received P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 59 Alstom Signaling Inc Simulator Reference THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK P2512A Rev J Aug 15 13 60 Alstom Signaling Inc A Add component 7 4 AFTC5 5 10 Archiving 5 15 C CAA package 3 4 CAAPE compatibility 7 40 definition 3 1 exiting 4 2 help 4 8 installing 4 2 starting 4 2 subdirectories 12 1 user preferences 4 6 using 3 3 Commands 13 33 Component types 7 5 ComponentView 4 4 5 4 5 5 7 4 7 6 7 53 7 54 7 56 7 67 7 68 8 8 Constants 7 44 D Drag and drop 7 33 Dummy applications 13 15 P2512A Rev J Aug 15 INDEX F FileView 4 4 4 5 5 1 5 5 5 14 7 2 7 52 7 64 7 65 7 66 8 1 8 4 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 16 8 17 8 20 8 22 8 24 8 26 8 31 8 35 8 37 8 43 8 45 8 49 9 9 10 1 10 3 11 3 11 4 12 1 12 6 G Graphical simulator 13 1 H History data 11 58 j Import project 5 6 5 9 Installation prerequisites 4 1 L Ladder logic 7 25 11 52 Latching 11 44 M Module properties 7 11 Alstom Signaling Inc INDEX N New project 5 6 P Project options 5 13 ProjectView 4 4 5 3 5 5 5 9 5 14 7 6 7 50 7 53 7 54 7 57 7 59 7 64 7 65 7 67 7 68 8 4 8 16 Protocol definit
306. vertical lines All parallel branches and their contents are selected Asingle variable can be selected by clicking over its name or symbol Asingle result can be selected by clicking over its name Clicking with the Ctrl key pressed or rubber banding can be used to select multiple branches multiple results or multiple data elements on one or more branches 7 5 6 6 Deleting Equation Data Data can be deleted by selecting it and using Edit Delete the Delete item in a popup menu or the Delete key The main branch in an equation cannot be deleted from the equation but its data is removed when a Delete is requested P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 37 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 5 6 7 Transferring Equation Data Cut and Paste or Drag and Drop can be used to transfer data within or between equations in the same or different sets of ladder logic The following data transfers are possible e Single variable from one branch to another branch or to a different location on the same branch e Single parallel branch combination from one branch to another branch or to a different location on the same branch One or more branches from one parallel branch combination to another One or more branches to the horizontal line of another branch A parallel combination of the transferred branches is created at the target location Multiple variables and parallel branch combinations to the horizontal line of another branch T
307. w being edited as part of a hardware system and the user can link other components to it The difference can be seen when certain boards are opened system related controls such as the ones for linking components are now enabled P2512A Rev J Aug 15 7 53 Alstom Signaling Inc Using CAAPE Graphics 7 8 3 Adding Components to the System Once a system is created create and add additional components needed in any order Editing a component does not need to be completed before adding it to a system the component can be created added to the system and then edited at a later time Components are added to specific boards in the hardware of the system Before adding components it is necessary to edit the hardware to add the boards involved Open the system that contains the hardware by double clicking on it in the ProjectView The hardware is opened for editing and the adding components function is enabled If the hardware component was opened by double clicking on it in the ComponentView adding components is not allowed components can only be added in the context of a system The possible linkages between boards and components are Logic Components CPU PD CPU II VSP CSEX NVSP and CenTraCode II s CPU boards require a logic component to specify the application logic they execute Open the board go to its Board tab and go to the Logic section on the tab Click the Logic button to add a logic component e Message Components
308. w it again Clear All Clear all contents of the History Window including all variables Clear History Data Clear the values data but not the list of selected variables Save Window Save history data to a file Setup Window Display the Setup History dialog to edit window format and contents Close Window Close history file data Cannot close the Current window tab Scales Float in Main Window P2512A Rev J Aug 15 Select a time scale for displaying the data If checked forces the History Window to float within the main window 11 58 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator It is possible to save history data to a file to open later to examine the data Follow the procedure in Table 11 2 Table 11 2 Save History Data to File Step Procedure 4 Right click over the History Window Current tab and Save Window from its popup menu to save the data To display the data at a later time go to File Open History File in the main 2 menu and browse to the saved file The file is displayed on a separate tab in the History Window Use Setup Window in the new tab s popup menu to open the Setup History 3 dialog Variables can only be added to or removed from the Current tab however variables can be reordered in the display of any tab 4 When done use Close Window in the popup menu to close the tab P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 59 Alstom Signaling In
309. w track plan and click OK A new track plan is created and added to the project and the current contents of the track plan view window are copied to it Any subsequent Save operations go to the new track plan file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 36 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 10 USING SIMULATION LOGIC 11 10 1 Adding Simulation Logic Simulation logic consists of user created logic statements that extend the application logic for purposes of simulation They might be used to simulate the behavior of field devices or external relay logic or perform special checks not in the actual application logic There are two ways to add simulation logic to a simulator project e Add one or more dummy applications to the simulator project Add one or more Simulator Logic Files to an application 11 10 1 1 Dummy Applications Dummy applications exist just for the purposes of simulation Their options and behavior are indistinguishable from that of the other applications in a simulator project their logic statements can be viewed in a ladder logic view their variables can be linked to track plan devices etc A dummy application can be created either through the CAAPE or by manually creating a simulator application data file using a text editor It is then added to the simulator project just as any other application I O Links can be used to establish discrete hardware connections between the dummy application and the other
310. y if a Logic Information File VTI or NVI is not available Options MSF YARD x Break Points Monitors Equation Skips Simulation Relay File r Setup Equation List Mark List Display Unmark Marked AS C Unmarked Unmark All m Marked Equations VPI PERMO VPI PERM1 VPI ON OFF XFP TE XFP DE NVCHECK ETE Figure 11 10 Simulator Options Relay File Use this page to mark or unmark equations for inclusion in the file then click Generate File to create the relay file Equations can also be marked or unmarked from the application s Ladder Logic View Click OK when all Simulator Options changes have been made Simulator options are not saved with the simulator project but can be saved in a snapshot file P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 20 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator 11 8 4 Using the Variables Dialog The Variables dialog can be used to set variable values adjust equation time delays and manage Watch Window variables Go to Setup Variables in the main menu E Application MSF YARD Type ALL ad Match False Time Delay Add to Watch 1145 1145 TF Watch Window Variables Remove Remove All Up Down Figure 11 11 Variables Dialog P2512A Rev J Aug 15 11 21 Alstom Signaling Inc Using the Graphical Simulator Select an application A list of variables is displayed The list can be filtered by v
311. ystems designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for any modifications whatsoever to the train control system which deviate from Alstom s originally delivered design and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such modifications Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any modifications to the train control system or for the safe performance of the train control system once Alstom s originally delivered design has been modified For train control systems not designed by Alstom the transit or railroad authority shall be solely responsible for the design of the train control system and any consequences to the system s safety integrity and performance as a result of such designs Alstom assumes no responsibility or liability for any designs or for the safe performance of the train control system DIGISAFE COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRE UNIQUE VSP BOARD ID A unique ID must be assigned to each iVPI VSP board in order to give each iVPI a unique identification in the network of DigiSAFE communications Failure to comply can degrade the safety performance of the train control system resulting in death or serious injury due to train collision or derailment P2512A Rev J Aug 15 1 3 Alstom Signaling Inc Safety Precautions DIGISAFE COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRE UNIQUE ZONE CONTROLLER ID A unique ID must be assigned to each zone controller in order to give each zone co

CAAPE User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents